Catalog Federal

All Over The World
CATALOGUE
2006
L.V. Distribution, Protection, Control, Energy Quality, Measurement Devices and Panel Systems
Manufactures according to CE Certificate.
Protects the energy transmission line against
overcurrent.
Function of remote reading and interference
(RS232,RS484 standard)GPRS,TCP/IP and FIBER
OPTIK is optional.
Follow the all device in network by CLINT software
on Internet.
Read the last failure of Oscillogram or instant
current curves.
Read all parameters on the screen simultaneously.
Select suitable fixed-time and inverse-time
characteristic according to IEC an ANSI standards
Adjust the function by keys on the relay and
communication ports easily.
The signals can remain continuously after the
failure, but can be reset by remote control or keys.
If the relay is operated without the signals wiped up,
previous signals can be wiped up and the new signals
can remain.
Enter 2 set val ues bel ongs to current
Over Current Relay
All Over the World
1 1
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
Automatic Control Unit of Heating
Systems for Passenger Coach
NH (H.R.C.) Fuses and Fuse Bases
Air Circuit Breakers
Load Break Switches
Cam Switches
Contactors
Residual Current Circuit Breakers
L.V. Current Transformers
L.V. Capacitors
Panelmeters
Miniature Circuit Breakers
Motor Protection Switches
L.V. Circuit Breakers
Electronic Products and Relays
Multi-Tariff Electronic Energy Meters
Vertical Type Switch Fuses
Thermal Overload Relay
EasyPan Distribution Boards
Technical Information
Reactive Power Control Relays
Design and specifications are subject to changes without notice.
D
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

&

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
P
a
n
e
l

S
y
s
t
e
m
s
M
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t
E
n
e
r
g
y

Q
u
a
l
i
t
y
C
o
n
t
r
o
l

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l
2 2
Low Voltage Protection,
Control and Measurement
Devices
Testing Laboratories
Federal Electric is the leading low voltage electrical product manufacturing company
in Turkey, which has the first and sole Short Circuit Test Laboratory, established to
give a direction for R&D operations. In this laboratory, 100 kA testing current can
be produced from 440V.
Local and Foreign Market
Federal Electric continous its marketing and sales activities through international
trade organizations to meet the needs of local and international customers.
Federal Electrics export activity has grown successfully every year.Federal Electric
is currently exporting its products to more than 40 countries which the main ones
are France, Germany, England, Sweden, Italy, Saudi Arabia, Egypt, Syria, Jordan,
Iraq, Russia, Sri Lanka.
Quality Assurance
Federal Electric, which is known to the world market, has been working according
to ISO 9001:2000 standards. Our working principles are based on continuous
development and satisfaction of the customer. All of this period is followed by static
technique from design to purchasing, from process control to storage and logistics,
from training and development to after sale services through the ERP software
system.
Design
To maintain the high level of technology and improve the product image, our R&D
dept. utilizes the program UNIGRAPHICS. This is one the most advanced programs
in CAD-CAM and aids this department to meet the demands of further development.
Production
At Federal Electric semi-automatic lines carry out assembly. Items come to the
line as components are assembled and leave the line ready for testing. %95 of
the raw material, which are used, at manufacturing, procured from domestic
market, silver alloyed contacts and bimetals are procured from the international
market. Most of its production capacity is being exported to more than 40 countries;
in Europe, Middle East and USA.
1/1
General Information About Circuit Breakers
Protection System of Circuit Breakers Against the Earth Residual Current
General Technical Characteristics of Circuit Breakers
Technical Characteristics and Order Codes of Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breaker Selection Table
Variation in Thermal Element Setting Currents According to Ambient Temperatures
Selectivity
Determination of Short - Circuit Current
Accessories for the Circuit Breakers
Automatic Inverser System
Electrical Circuit Diagram of Motor Operating Mechanism
Time - Current Curves of Circuit Breakers
Dimensions of Circuit Breakers
2
5
6
8
12
13
14
17
19
23
24
25
26
-2006
F21
F22
F10
F11
F12 F31
F32
F33
F61
F62
F71 F51
F52
F53
F82
F83
F111E
F112E
F91E
F92E
F82E
F83E
F101E
F102E
1 1
LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Circuit Breakers (Electronic Type)
Circuit Breakers (Thermal-Magnetic Type)
CONTENTS
LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Circuit Breakers (Thermal-Magnetic Type)
Circuit Breakers (Electronic Type)
CONTENTS
1/2
-2006
How overcurrent occurs...?
Releases :
Overcurrent Releases :
General :
Definition :
Circuit breaker is a mechanical device, capable of
making,carrying and breaking currents under normal circuit
conditions and also making, carrying for a specified time
and breaking currents under specified abnormal circuit
conditions such as short-circuit and over-current.
Operating principle of Circuit Breaker :
Most important function of the circuit breaker is the protection
of the circuit at the abnormal operating conditions besides
making, carrying and breaking the currents. Circuit breakers
are equipped with some units to carry out protection function.
Opening units of low voltage circuit breakers are defined
as a release according to IEC 60947-2/EN 60947-2 standards
and CE certificate.
Values of all currents which exceeds to the rated currents
are defined as overcurrent. Overcurrent occurs when there
is an increase in the power, which is being absorbed from
the circuit or when a short circuit occurs. Both of the
overcurrents are dangerous for electrical circuits. Overcurrents
cause thermal and dynamic forces in electrical circuits.
Overcurrents which occur with increasing the power can be
2 or 3 fold from rated current.
Due to short-circuit current, abnormally high current occurs
according to feature of electrical circuit. For example this can
be 3,2 kA at 100 kVA transformer and 60 kA at the 2500 kVA
transformer.
Electrical devices such as transformers, generators, motors,
capacitors, cables... etc. have a value of withstand (I
2
t) against
the thermal and dynamic forces due to when a short-circuit
occurs, the overcurrent passing through the circuit causes
a temperature rise. As it is shown on the formula, the value
of current is so important as well as the period of time of
current. When current builds up, it is necessary to decrease
the time of flow current in order to hold the I
2
t value less
A release which causes a mechanical switching device to
open with or without time-delay when the current in the
release exceeds a predetermined value.
A release which permits a circuit breaker to open, without
any intentional time delay.
- Overcurrent releases
- Undervoltage releases
- Shunt releases
All of the breakers are equipped with overcurrent releases.
Undervoltage and shunt releases are not standard
accessories, but they can be fixed on the breaker by the
request of customer.
Fig-1 Time-current curve of
circuit breaker
I
2
xt
I
t
Breaker
I= Passing current
t= Time of passing current
Device
I
Time delay overcurrent releases (Category B) :
An over current release intended to operate at the end of
the time delay. The current passing through the circuit
reaches the value of adjusted short-circuit current, breaker
doesnt open rapidly. (Only after some time delay. In other
terms they permitted the short-circuit current if the time is
not dangerous for equipment and cable.) This process is
to be realized by giving delayed signal the opening coil by
means of electronic circuit at the electronic breakers. Delay
overcurrent releases are usually connected to main circuit
at the beginning of line for selectivity.
Without time-delay overcurrent releases
(Category A) :
When the current passing through the circuit increases the
value of determined current, breaker rapidly opens the
circuit. These kind of releases especially effect at high
overcurrent which occurs as a result of short-circuit. When
a current builds-up, it is necessary to decrease the breaking
time of current around ms in order to hold I
2
t value low.
Short-circuit overcurrent releases :
They are manufactured in two categories :
- Without time delay overcurrent releases (Category A)
- Time - delay overcurrent releases (Category B).
than determineted value. Low voltage circuit breakers provide
confident protection by opening the circuit under the I
2
t
value for device, (Figure-1)
A release which permits a mechanical switching device to
open or close, with or without time-delay ,when the voltage
across the terminals of the release falls below a predetermined
value. Whenever the voltage falls below a predetermined level
or breaks one of phases, undervoltage release mechanism (it
trips) operates. When this condition occurs, the circuit breaker
trips and can not be energized until the power has been
restored to 85% of the rated voltage. The dropping or breaking
of voltage causes many kind of break-down. For example, if
there is a disturbance of any one of the phases separately,
this will cause the other phases to overload and burn the
motor. This kind of break-down is prevented by installing
undervoltage relay (customer supplied when required) in
Undervoltage Releases :
Pic-1 Inside of circuit breaker
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT CIRCUIT BREAKERS GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT CIRCUIT BREAKERS
- Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers :
Magnetic Protection :
For the protection over 3xIn short circuit.
Another function of the circuit breaker is to protect circuit
against short-circuits. Short-circuit occurs when different
phase or phase-neutral is in series. When a short-circuit
occurs, the current passing through the circuit causes a
magnetic field and magnetization due to overcurrent. In that
case the energy of system should be interrupted rapidly in
comparision with thermal protection. So that breaker instantly
should be trip to protect the load. Magnetic trip action is
achieved by mechanical opening mechanism which operates
by magnetic field and magnetization. Magnetic elements
can be either fixed or adjustable by manufacturer, depending
upon the type of breaker.
- Circuit breakers with electronic overcurrent
releases :
The difference between breakers with bimetal and electronic
is that the overcurrent releases for electronic breakers are
controlled by an electronical circuit. The electronic control
is provided by a most precise 8 byte micro controller. During
the design of electronic circuit, worst possibilities which can
occur on the service have been taken into consideration.
On high short-circuit currents (>15 In) directly tripping is
ensured without need for the electronic circuit. So, the
possibility of fault in electronic circuit is reduced to minimum.
The tripping time of the electronic circuit breaker is
independent to the ambient temperature.
Federal electronic breakers can be connected to computer
by means of RS-232 protocol (customer supplied when
required). That disc of computer can be used instead of
current measurement instrument.
- It will be able to read the minimum, average,... etc. values
of time constant (night-day) of the supplies current.
- It is possible to get statistical data promptly.
- In case of overcurrent, the opening time of the circuit
breaker may be adjusted.
-The rated current and magnetic opening adjustment can
be regulated precisely by computer.
-External opening control can be given.
-Electronic circuit breakers have a wide adjustable range
of rated and short-circuit opening current.
Electronic breaker units are intensive to ambient temperatures
within a certain temperature range. The temperature range
for most Federal circuit breaker trip units is - 30 C to 60 C
Electronic circuit breaker provides wide possibility of uses
because of it is tremendous technology and advantages.
Also, electronic circuit breakers dont effect from temperature.
Low voltage circuit breakers are manufactured as two types
according to type of overcurrent releases. These are: Thermal-
Magnetic and Electronic circuit breakers.
As a definition; a release energized by a source of voltage.
A shunt trip provides remote controlled tripping of a circuit
breaker. Remote device can be a pushbutton, cut off switch
or an other pilot device. Shunt releases trip consist of an
intermittent rated selonoid tripping device installed in the
breaker on site or factory (customer supplied when required)
The tripping device is energized by AC or DC voltage. When
voltage is applied to shunt trip release, it should trip between
70% and 110% of the feeding voltage. (According to EN
60947).
TYPES OF CIRCUIT BREAKER :
Shunt Trip Releases :
CURRENT- LIMITING CIRCUIT- BREAKERS :
Definition :
During the operation of the breaker opening and closing
with handle, the position of moving contact at the position
ON is held at pos1 At the position OFF is held at pos.3
(Figure-4). Whenever a short-circuit occurs, at the circuit
which has none limiting characteristic, the short-circuit
current causes an opposite magnetic field strength of the
electromagnet in the breaker. The electromagnet moves the
trip bar causing the circuit breaker to trip. This time is
between 10-20 ms at 100,160,250 A Breakers.
In addition to that, opposite magnetic field attracts the
moving contact from pos-1 to pos-2 at Federal breakers
with limiting and contacts are held at this position. In other
words, the contact does not come to the ON position
automatically again. Opening of moving contact begins in
the first ms of short-circuit. Contact comes to pos-2 at first
two ms, complete breaking of arc finishes maximum 5-6 ms
The handle position indicates the contact status : closed,
opened or tripped ( a midway position). To restore service
after the breaker trips, the handle must first be moved from
the center position (triped) to OFF to reset the mechanism
and then to ON. This distinct trip point is particularly
advantageous where breakers are group mounted, such as
in panelboard applications, because the handle position
clearly indicates the faulty circuit.
Operating principle :
A circuit breaker with a break-time short enough to prevent
the short circuit current reaching its otherwise attainable
peak value.
breaker. Control of other phases have been done by using
contactor so that as a general undervoltage relay feeds
from two phase. (Figure-2)
-2006
K : Contactor
(Coil AC 380 V)
F4: Undervoltage
release (UVR)
Q1: Low voltage
circuit breaker
Fig-2: Application
of undervoltage
releases
U
K
K
L1
L2
L3
Load
A1
A2
F4
Q1
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT CIRCUIT BREAKERS GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1 1
Thermal Protection :
For the protection between (1,1-3)xIn overcurrent.
A bimetal consists of two strips of metal bonded together.
Each strip has a different thermal rate of heat expansion.
Heat due to excessive current causes the bimetal to bend,
this causes the operating mechanism to trip, pushing the
trip bar and unlatch the contact. Bending of bimetal is direct
proportional to the current which passes through the contacts
of the breaker. Building up current means increasing heat.
By using this method thermal trip action is achieved through
the use of a bimetal heated by over load current which
bigger than predetermined rated current. Thermal elements
(bimetal) are calibrated and supplied for each current rating
by the manufacturer.
The function of the arc extinguisher (separator) is the confine,
divide and extinguish an arc. During the moving contact
separates from the constant contact, the current flows
through air. This is defined as an arc. These are should be
extinguished simultaneously.
How arc is extinguished?
When an interruption occurs and the contacts separate, the
arc flows through the ionized region between the contacts
induces a magnetic field around the arc and arc extinguisher.
As the lines of magnetic flux , force drive the arc into the
metal plates, deionizing the gas dividing and cooling the
arc as shown in Figure-6.
Arc Extinguisher :
Contacts :
Contact alloy is determined by taking into consideration the
value of current which breaking and carrying in breaker.
Generally, silver, carbon, nickel, wolfram alloys are used at
breaker. Silver, carbon alloys which constructed soft
constraction are used on the constants (bottom) contacts.
Silver-wolfram contacts which constructed more stiff
constructions are used moving (upper) contacts. Moving
contacts are constructed as a convex construction. So that
convex and stiff alloy contacts set properly on the soft constant
contacts at the every opening and closing of breaker. So this
provides the lowest passing withstand. Moving contact touches
properly on the constant contacts for low touching withstand.
Excessive contact press force causes the destruction of
contacts at a short time. For this reason contact alloy is so
i mportant for the sui tabl e openi ng and cl osi ng.
Bimetal :
A bimetal consists of two strips of metal bonded together.
Each strip has a different thermal rate of heat expension.
Heat due to excessive current causes the bimetal to bend.
The bimetals having the greater rate of expansion will be
on the outside (Longer boundary) of the bend curve. To
trips breaker, the bimetal must bend far enough to physically
the trip bar and unlatch the contacts.
Fig-5 Short circuit current curve according to I-t
Peak value of expected
short-circuit current
Peak value of limiting
short-circuit current
I max
I limit
:
:
I max
I limit
Expected
short-circuit
current
I
t (msec.)
10 msec. 5 msec.
Limit short-circuit
current
The Advantages of Federal Current - Limiting
Circuit Breakers
- The breakers protect transformers, cables and other devices
in the circuit in compliance with type of breaker by limiting
circuit up to 90% .
- Explosion and arc are held at very low level in circuit so
that personnel safety is under guaranteed.
Beginning of short-circuits, magnetic releases move the
operating mechanism to OFF position, mechanism moves
moving contact from pos-2 to pos-3. The current which
moves moving contact from pos-1 to pos-2 is smaller than
expected short-circuit current does not pass continuously
in breaker with limiting. (Fig-5)
Fig-3
The view of moving
and fixed contacts
Arc extinguisher
Metal
plates
Current
Magnetic
force
Magnetic field Moving contact
Fixed contact
Current
pos-01
pos-02
pos-03
Fig - 4
The positions of contact
Frame and cover are molded from glass-polyester material
which is mentioned as BMC (Bulk Moulding Compound) in
literature that combines ruggedness , high dielectric strength
and high mechanical resistance in a compact design.
Molded case circuit breakers are designed and tested in
compliance with IEC 947-2 standard and can withstand up
to 160 C continuously.
Base, frame and cover:
-2006
Fig-6
magnetic field
magnetic force
direction of current
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT CIRCUIT BREAKERS GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Precaution against residual current in the circuit
breaker :
Different connection :
If all of cables are unable to pass through the toroid, a
number of toroids can be connected parallel to the same
earth residual relay. But this type of connection decreases
the sensitivity of device, so that opening period of device
increases.
If the toroid can not be installed to environment of big
main bars, it can be fixed to neutral-earth bars of transformer.
(For balanced loads)
1/5
Protection system of circuit breakers against the
earth residual current :
Even the smallest value of earth residual current (> 30 mA)
in a electrical circuit can cause extreme danger to start a
fire or against electric shock. That is why an additional
protection is used against the earth residual current.
Earth residual system can be added to electronic breaker
without additional equipment. (0.1-1) x In precious protection
is made with this system. In the event of value of earth
residual with In 30 mA, protection against the earth residual
is made by toroid transformer and with sensitive relay
combination at the thermal-magnetic breakers and another
breaker with electronic. At this system in the beginning,
remote opening coil or under voltage coil should be fixed
to breaker in order that they can trip against earth residual
current. (Figure-8) Fault current of residual current perception
relay must be adjusted at the suitable values according to
type of protection and defectivity among the another fault
current element. This is described as a 30 mA against
electrical shocks. And 300-500 mA for fire protection, in
compliance with IEC 60947-2 standard.
Installation :
All of phases and neutral conductor are passed inside the
Toroidal transformer. (Earthing cable will not be passed
inside the Toroidal transformer.) Seconder cables of Toroidal
transformer will be connected to (S1-S2) terminals of earth
residual current relay and suitable voltage which written on
the relay is given to incoming terminal (A1-A2) of energy.
Exactly, remote opening coil or undervoltage relay should
be installed to breaker in order that they can trip against
the earth residual current. If circuit breaker has remote
opening relay, the energy which incoming to opening relay
is made on the normally opening contact of earth residual
relay. (Figure-7)
If circuit breaker has an undervoltage coil, the energy which
is incoming to undervoltage coil is made from upper side
of breaker and on the normally closed contact of earth
residual relay. (Figure-9) Commonly required, these
accessories are factory installed.
-2006
Fig-8 Protection system with circuit breaker against the earth residual current
Shunt release or
undervoltage coil
Residual
current
relay
Toroidal
transformer
N
Load
R S T
Fig-7 F1 : Shunt release
Residual
current relay
Toroidal
transformer
R S T N
LOAD
S2 S1 3 2 1
A2 A1
AC 220V
F1
C1 C2
Q1
Circuit
breaker
Residual current protection system with shunt release which
in breaker :
Residual current protection system with undervoltage release
which in circuit breaker :
Fig-9
Residual
current relay
R S T N
LOAD
S2 S1 3 2 1
A2 A1
AC 220V
Toroidal
transformer
F2
D1 D2
Q1
U<
Circuit
breaker
F2 : Undervoltage release (UVR)
- All of the cables (phases and neutral) of conductor should
be passed inside the toroid transformer. Earth cable should
not be passed i nsi de the toroi dal transfor mer.
- Diameter of toroidal transformer must be suitable.
PROTECTION SYSTEM OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS AGAINST THE EARTH RESIDUAL CURRENT PROTECTION SYSTEM OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS AGAINST THE EARTH RESIDUAL CURRENT 1 1
-2006 1/6
Number of pole
Rated operational voltage - Ue (a.c.) 50-60 Hz
Rated insulation voltage - Ui (a.c.) 50-60 Hz
Rated impulse withstand voltage - Uimp
Testing voltage (1 min) (a.c.) 50-60 Hz
Rated current adjustment range - I1
Short-circuit opening current range-I2
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity - Icu
(a.c.) 50-60 Hz 220/240 V
(a.c.) 50-60 Hz 380/415 V
(a.c.) 50-60 Hz 440 V
(a.c.) 50-60 Hz 500 V
(a.c.) 50-60 Hz 690 V
(d.c.) 250 V
Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity-Ics415V~
Rated short circuit making capacity-Icm 415V~
Breaking time
Catagory (EN 60947-2) IEC 947-2
Fixed thermal - fixed magnetic
Adjustable thermal - fixed magnetic
Adjustable thermal - adjustable magnetic
Fixed thermal - adjustable magnetic
Microprocess unit (electronic)
Current limiting
Mechanical life Operation
Electrical life Operation
Dimensions Wideness
Height
Depth
Weight
Min. Connection cross sections
Connection terminal tightening torque
Notes :
Indicated parts are standard productions, Indicated parts are produced
upon order.
Calibration is possible for different values according to application.
Icu: O-t-CO (O : Breaking operation, CO : Closed-breaking operation,
t : Waiting time).
Two poles of circuit breakers are connected in series
Ics: O-t-CO-t-CO (O : Breaking operation , CO : Closed-breaking operation , t : Waiting time)
Connection cross section is given according to IEC 60947-1/EN 60947-1. This is 10 mm
2
,for 40 A
and 70 mm
2
for 160 A.
F61, F62, F91E, F92E, F101E, F102E, F111E and F112E types of circuit breakers are manufactured
as a standard long bar
Technical characteristics of
low voltage circuit breakers
IEC 60947-2
EN 60947-2
Undervoltage Release
Shunt trip
Auxiliary contact
Motorized operating mechanism
Extended rotary handle
Locking mechanism with key
Extension bar
Terminal cover
Inverser lock
Phase separator
Accessories
Type
3
5
H
D
W
8
8
8
A
2
4
Quantity
V
V
kV
V
A
A
(kA rms)
(kA rms)
(kA rms)
(kA rms)
(kA rms)
(kA rms)
(kA rms)
kA peak
ms
mm (W)
mm (H)
mm (D)
kg
mm
2
Nm
<7
A
>15.000
3000
40
169
85
0,85
16,25,32,40,50,63,80
100,125,160,200,225
1
240
750
8
3.000
Fixed
8xIn
35
12
-
-
-
10
35(240V~)
74(240V~)
2.5,4,6,10,10,16
25,35,50,70,95,95
F01 F02
10
16,25,32,40,50,63,80
100,125,160,200,225,250
85
50
32
22
13
22
50
105
<7
A
>15.000
3000
106
165
90.5
2,2
3
415
750
8
4.000
(0,8-1)In
8xIn
2.5,4,6,10,10,16,25
35,50,70,95,95,120
F33 F31 F32

100
65
40
25
14
22
65
143
65
35
25
18
12
22
35
74
10
2.5,4,6,10,10
16,25,35,50
16,25,32,40,50
63,80,100,125
<7
A
>15.000
3000
90
155
64.5
1,3
3
415
750
8
3.000
(0,8-1)In
8xIn
F22 F21
100
50
42
30
20
15
25
105
50
25
20
12
8
15
25
52
6
<10
A
>15.000
3000
76
120
75
0,9
16,25,32,40,50
63,80,100,125
25
16
10
8
-
15
8
32
2.5,4,6,10,10
16,25,35,50
F11
3
415
750
8
3.000
Fixed
10xIn
6
F10
30
20
12
9
-
20
20
40
F12
16,25,32,40,50
63,80,100,125,160
3
415
750
8
3.000
(0,8-1)In
10xIn
35
20
18
10
6
18
20
40
<10
A
>15.000
3000
90
120
76
1
2.5,4,6,10,10
16,25,35,50,70
6
Rated current - In (40 or 55C)

65
14
-
-
-
10
65(240V~)
143(240V~)
GENERAL TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS GENERAL TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS
-2006
1/7
Notes :
Electromagnetic releases at the electronic circuit breakers: In circuit breakers with
electronic trip , fast acting electro-magnetic release is additionaly provided on each phase.In
case of high short circuit current (>15xIn), the electromagnetic release trips the circuit breaker
independently.(overriding the electronic trip).
Thus circuit breaker clears the fault even if there is malfunction in the electronic trip. This is
a great advantage of Federal breakers with electronic trip.
For new types of circuit breakers, accessories can be used by opening the front
cover by the users (Plug-in).
F61
185,240
25
185,240,2(30x5),
2(40x5),40x12
3
415
750
8
4000
(0,8-1)In
(5-8)In
<10
A
> 15.000
3000
210
280
108
9,5
300,400,500
630,800
40
F82 F83
75
50
30
20
20
50
105
100
65
50
42
25
35
143
80x15 , 2(80x10),
2(80x15)
3
415
750
8
4000
(0,4-1)In
(2-10)In
<20
A
> 15.000
3000
392
412
250.5
55
1600,2000,2500
85
50
35
30
20
50
105
F111E F112E
125
65
50
42
25
35
143
6
7
50
F53 F52 F51
200,225,250
3,4
415
750
8
4.000
(0,7-1)In
(4-10)In
85
50
35
25
16
22
50
105
<7
A
>15.000
3000
105 (140 4p)
256
105.5
4,2 (5,6 4p)
95,95,120
65
35
25
20
14
22
35
74
100
65
50
40
18
22
65
143
25
300,400
3
415
750
8
4000
(0,7-1)In
(5-10)xIn
<10
A
> 15.000
3000
140
257
140
5,8
F62
50
25
20
15
10
20
25
52
100
35
28
21
14
25
25
72
F71
300,400,500
630,800
185,240,2(30x5),
2(40x5),40x12
3
415
750
8
4.000
(0,8-1)In
(5-10)xIn
42
35
30
25
20
20
27
74
<10
A
> 15.000
3000
210
270
109
8
40
F92E
1000,1250
40x15 , 2(40x10)
6
3
415
750
8
4000
(0,4-1)In
(2-10)In
<20
A
>15.000
3000
210
370
121.8
21
F82E
185,240,2(30x5),
2(40x5),40x12
F83E
3
415
750
8
4000
(0,4-1)In
(2-10)In
<10
A
> 15.000
3000
210
280
108
9,5
75
50
35
30
20
50
105
7
300,400,500
630,800
100
65
50
42
25
35
143
40
F101E
1250,1600
2(40x10),2(40x12)
6
3
415
750
8
4000
(0,4-1)In
(2-10)In
<20
A
>15.000
3000
210
370
121.8
27
7
F102E
80
50
40
25
20
25
105
100
65
45
35
25
35
143
50 50
7
F91E
80
50
35
25
18
25
105
100
65
45
35
25
35
143
6
GENERAL TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS GENERAL TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1 1
-2006
1/8
3 Pole Thermal-magnetic circuit breakers for Standard Protection
Order Code Type
Medium breaking capacity
Adjusting
range
I1 (A)
Rated
current
In (A)
High breaking capacity
9AM-TMS43-0016
9AM-TMS43-0020
9AM-TMS43-0025
9AM-TMS43-0032
9AM-TMS43-0040
9AM-TMS43-0050
9AM-TMS43-0063
9AM-TMS43-0080
9AM-TMS43-0100
9AM-TMS43-0125
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
9AB-TMS43-0016
9AB-TMS43-0020
9AB-TMS43-0025
9AB-TMS43-0032
9AB-TMS43-0040
9AB-TMS43-0050
9AB-TMS43-0063
9AB-TMS43-0080
9AB-TMS43-0100
9AB-TMS43-0125
9AB-TMS43-0160
9AB-TMS43-0200
9AB-TMS43-0225
9AB-TMS43-0250
9AD-TMS43-0200
9AD-TMS43-0225
9AD-TMS43-0250
9AP-TMS43-0300
9AP-TMS43-0400
-
-
-
-
-
9AG-TMS43-0300
9AG-TMS43-0400
9AG-TMS43-0500
9AG-TMS43-0630
9AG-TMS43-0800
F11
-
-
F32
F52
F62
-
F82
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
10-16
16-20
20-25
25-32
32-40
40-50
50-63
63-80
80-100
100-125
125-160
10-16
16-20
20-25
25-32
32-40
40-50
50-63
63-80
80-100
100-125
10-16
16-20
20-25
25-32
32-40
40-50
50-63
63-80
80-100
100-125
125-160
160-200
180-225
200-250
160-200
180-225
200-250
315-400
400-500
240-300
315-400
400-500
500-630
630-800
240-300
315-400
400-500
500-630
630-800
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
200
225
250
200
225
250
300
400
300
400
500
630
800
300
400
500
630
800
Type
-
-
F22
F33
F53
-
-
F83
Order Code
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
9AA-THS43-0016
9AA-THS43-0020
9AA-THS43-0025
9AA-THS43-0032
9AA-THS43-0040
9AA-THS43-0050
9AA-THS43-0063
9AA-THS43-0080
9AA-THS43-0100
9AA-THS43-0125
9AB-THS43-0016
9AB-THS43-0020
9AB-THS43-0025
9AB-THS43-0032
9AB-THS43-0040
9AB-THS43-0050
9AB-THS43-0063
9AB-THS43-0080
9AB-THS43-0100
9AB-THS43-0125
9AB-THS43-0160
9AB-THS43-0200
9AB-THS43-0225
9AB-THS43-0250
9AD-THS43-0200
9AD-THS43-0225
9AD-THS43-0250
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
9AG-THS43-0300
9AG-THS43-0400
9AG-THS43-0500
9AG-THS43-0630
9AG-THS43-0800
Order Code Type
Standard breaking capacity
9AM-TSS43-0016
9AM-TSS43-0020
9AM-TSS43-0025
9AM-TSS43-0032
9AM-TSS43-0040
9AM-TSS43-0050
9AM-TSS43-0063
9AM-TSS43-0080
9AM-TSS43-0100
9AM-TSS43-0125
9AR-TSS43-0016
9AR-TSS43-0020
9AR-TSS43-0025
9AR-TSS43-0032
9AR-TSS43-0040
9AR-TSS43-0050
9AR-TSS43-0063
9AR-TSS43-0080
9AR-TSS43-0100
9AR-TSS43-0125
9AR-TSS43-0160
9AA-TSS43-0016
9AA-TSS43-0020
9AA-TSS43-0025
9AA-TSS43-0032
9AA-TSS43-0040
9AA-TSS43-0050
9AA-TSS43-0063
9AA-TSS43-0080
9AA-TSS43-0100
9AA-TSS43-0125
9AB-TSS43-0016
9AB-TSS43-0020
9AB-TSS43-0025
9AB-TSS43-0032
9AB-TSS43-0040
9AB-TSS43-0050
9AB-TSS43-0063
9AB-TSS43-0080
9AB-TSS43-0100
9AB-TSS43-0125
9AB-TSS43-0160
9AB-TSS43-0200
9AB-TSS43-0225
9AB-TSS43-0250
9AD-TSS43-0200
9AD-TSS43-0225
9AD-TSS43-0250
9AP-TMS43-0300
9AP-TMS43-0400
9AF-TSS43-0300
9AF-TSS43-0400
9AF-TSS43-0500
9AF-TSS43-0630
9AF-TSS43-0800
-
-
-
-
-
F10
F12
F21
F31
F51
F61
F71
Breaker
type
I2 (A)
160
200
250
320
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
160
200
250
320
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1600
200
200
200
250
320
400
500
640
800
1000
200
200
200
250
320
400
500
800
800
1000
1280
1600
1800
2000
(4-10) In
(4-10) In
(4-10) In
(5-10) In
(5-10) In
(5-8) In
(5-8) In
(5-8) In
(5-8) In
(5-8) In
(5-8) In
(5-8) In
(5-8) In
(5-8) In
(5-8) In
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS and ORDER CODES of CIRCUIT BREAKERS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS and ORDER CODES of CIRCUIT BREAKERS
-2006
1/9
3 Pole Thermal-magnetic circuit breakers for Generator Protection
Order Code Type
Adjusting
range
I1 (A)
Rated
current
In
(A)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
9AB-TMJ43-0016
9AB-TMJ43-0020
9AB-TMJ43-0025
9AB-TMJ43-0032
9AB-TMJ43-0040
9AB-TMJ43-0050
9AB-TMJ43-0063
9AB-TMJ43-0080
9AB-TMJ43-0100
9AB-TMJ43-0125
9AB-TMJ43-0160
9AB-TMJ43-0200
9AB-TMJ43-0225
9AB-TMJ43-0250
-
F32
10-16
16-20
20-25
25-32
32-40
40-50
50-63
63-80
80-100
100-125
10-16
16-20
20-25
25-32
32-40
40-50
50-63
63-80
80-100
100-125
125-160
160-200
180-225
200-250
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
200
225
250
Type
F22
F33
Order Code
9AA-THJ43-0016
9AA-THJ43-0020
9AA-THJ43-0025
9AA-THJ43-0032
9AA-THJ43-0040
9AA-THJ43-0050
9AA-THJ43-0063
9AA-THJ43-0080
9AA-THJ43-0100
9AA-THJ43-0125
9AB-THJ43-0016
9AB-THJ43-0020
9AB-THJ43-0025
9AB-THJ43-0032
9AB-THJ43-0040
9AB-THJ43-0050
9AB-THJ43-0063
9AB-THJ43-0080
9AB-THJ43-0100
9AB-THJ43-0125
9AB-THJ43-0160
9AB-THJ43-0200
9AB-THJ43-0225
9AB-THJ43-0250
Order Code Type
9AA-TSJ43-0016
9AA-TSJ43-0020
9AA-TSJ43-0025
9AA-TSJ43-0032
9AA-TSJ43-0040
9AA-TSJ43-0050
9AA-TSJ43-0063
9AA-TSJ43-0080
9AA-TSJ43-0100
9AA-TSJ43-0125
9AB-TSJ43-0016
9AB-TSJ43-0020
9AB-TSJ43-0025
9AB-TSJ43-0032
9AB-TSJ43-0040
9AB-TSJ43-0050
9AB-TSJ43-0063
9AB-TSJ43-0080
9AB-TSJ43-0100
9AB-TSJ43-0125
9AB-TSJ43-0160
9AB-TSJ43-0200
9AB-TSJ43-0225
9AB-TSJ43-0250
F21
F31
Breaker
type
I2 (A)
160
160
160
160
200
250
300
320
400
500
160
160
160
160
200
250
300
320
400
500
640
800
900
1000
3 Pole Thermal-magnetic circuit breakers for Motor Protection
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
10-16
16-20
20-25
25-32
32-40
40-50
50-63
63-80
80-100
100-125
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
F22
9AA-THM43-0016
9AA-THM43-0020
9AA-THM43-0025
9AA-THM43-0032
9AA-THM43-0040
9AA-THM43-0050
9AA-THM43-0063
9AA-THM43-0080
9AA-THM43-0100
9AA-THM43-0125
9AA-TSM43-0016
9AA-TSM43-0020
9AA-TSM43-0025
9AA-TSM43-0032
9AA-TSM43-0040
9AA-TSM43-0050
9AA-TSM43-0063
9AA-TSM43-0080
9AA-TSM43-0100
9AA-TSM43-0125
F21
200
200
250
320
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
Order Code Type
Adjusting
range
I1 (A)
Rated
current
In
(A)
Type Order Code Order Code Type
Breaker
type
I2 (A)
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS and ORDER CODES of CIRCUIT BREAKERS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS and ORDER CODES of CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1 1
-2006
1/10
Note: Circuit breakers can be produced only without thermal adjustment for orders (Only magnetic adjustment).
1 Pole Thermal-magnetic circuit breakers
Rated
Current
In (A)
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
200
225
Adjusting
range
I1 (A)
10-16
16-20
20-25
25-32
32-40
40-50
50-63
63-80
80-100
100-125
125-160
160-200
180-225
Tripping
current of
electromagnetic
releases
I2 (A)
160
160
200
250
320
400
500
800
800
1000
1280
1600
1800
9AB-TSS41-0016
9AB-TSS41-0020
9AB-TSS41-0025
9AB-TSS41-0032
9AB-TSS41-0040
9AB-TSS41-0050
9AB-TSS41-0063
9AB-TSS41-0080
9AB-TSS41-0100
9AB-TSS41-0125
9AB-TSS41-0160
9AB-TSS41-0200
9AB-TSS41-0225
F01 F02
9AB-THS43-0016
9AB-THS43-0020
9AB-THS43-0025
9AB-THS43-0032
9AB-THS43-0040
9AB-THS43-0050
9AB-THS43-0063
9AB-THS43-0080
9AB-THS43-0100
9AB-THS43-0125
9AB-THS43-0160
9AB-THS43-0200
9AB-THS43-0225
3 Pole Thermal-magnetic circuit breakers for Motor Protection
9AB-TMM43-0016
9AB-TMM43-0020
9AB-TMM43-0025
9AB-TMM43-0032
9AB-TMM43-0040
9AB-TMM43-0050
9AB-TMM43-0063
9AB-TMM43-0080
9AB-TMM43-0100
9AB-TMM43-0125
9AB-TMM43-0160
9AB-TMM43-0200
9AB-TMM43-0225
9AB-TMM43-0250
F32
110-16
16-20
20-25
25-32
32-40
40-50
50-63
63-80
80-100
100-125
125-160
160-200
180-225
200-250
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
200
225
250
F33
9AB-THM43-0016
9AB-THM43-0020
9AB-THM43-0025
9AB-THM43-0032
9AB-THM43-0040
9AB-THM43-0050
9AB-THM43-0063
9AB-THM43-0080
9AB-THM43-0100
9AB-THM43-0125
9AB-THM43-0160
9AB-THM43-0200
9AB-THM43-0225
9AB-THM43-0250
9AB-TSM43-0016
9AB-TSM43-0020
9AB-TSM43-0025
9AB-TSM43-0032
9AB-TSM43-0040
9AB-TSM43-0050
9AB-TSM43-0063
9AB-TSM43-0080
9AB-TSM43-0100
9AB-TSM43-0125
9AB-TSM43-0160
9AB-TSM43-0200
9AB-TSM43-0225
9AB-TSM43-0250
F31
200
200
250
320
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1600
2000
2250
2500
Order Code Type
Adjusting
range
I1 (A)
Rated
current
In
(A)
Type Order Code Order Code Type
Breaker
type
I2 (A)
Order Code Type Order Code Type
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS
-2006
1/11
Circuit Breakers can be manufactured as thermal fixed (Only magnetic adjustable) upon request.
Delay time of electromagnetic relays can be ajdustable as t2: 100-150-200-250-300-350-400 ms. upon request.
3 Pole Electronic circuit breakers
Rated
Current
In (A)
300
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1250
1600
1600
2000
2500
Adjusting
range
I1 (A)
Tripping
current of
electromagnetic
releases
I2 (A)
(2-10) I1
(2-10) I1
(2-10) I1
(2-10) I1
9AG-EMS43-0300
9AG-EMS43-0400
9AG-EMS43-0500
9AG-EMS43-0630
9AG-EMS43-0800
9AG-EMS43-1000
9AG-EMS43-1250
9AI-EMS43-1250
9AI-EMS43-1600
9AG-EMS43-1600
9AG-EMS43-2000
9AG-EMS43-2500
Type Order Code Type Order Code
F82E
F91E
F101E
F111E
120-300
160-400
200-500
250-630
320-800
400-1000
500-1250
500-1250
640-1600
640-1600
800-2000
1000-2500
F83E
F92E
F102E
F112E
9AG-EHS43-0300
9AG-EHS43-0400
9AG-EHS43-0500
9AG-EHS43-0630
9AG-EHS43-0800
9AG-EHS43-1000
9AG-EHS43-1250
9AI-EHS43-1250
9AI-EHS43-1600
9AG-EHS43-1600
9AG-EHS43-2000
9AG-EHS43-2500
Circuit Breaker F series from 16 A to 2500 A.
Thus circuit breaker clears the fault even if malfunction
in the electronic trip.This is great advantage of Federal
breakers with electronic trip.
Circuit breakers can manufactured thermal fixed (only
magnetic adjustable) upon request
Double Protection Unit For Short Circuit Current
In circuit breakers with electronic trip, beyond thermal
protection, fast-acting electro-magnetic release is additionally
provided on each phase.In case of high short circuit current
(>15xIn) the electromagnetic release trips the circuit breaker
i ndependentl y (over ri di ng the el ectroni c tri p)
Electromagnetic Releases At The Electronic Circuit Breakers
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS and ORDER CODES of CIRCUIT BREAKERS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS and ORDER CODES of CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1 1
-2006
1/12
Circuit Breaker selection table for protection of motors with
three phase
(To give direct way to standard squirrel cage motors 400 V,
4 pole)
Motor rated
current
(A)
8,5
11,5
15,5
18,5
20
22,5
30
36
43
52
58
68
72
79
85
98
104
112
117
142
147
169
188
204
243
260
273
280
292
333
342
368
408
465
565
580
Motor
Power
(kW) (Hp)
5,5
7,5
10
12
13,5
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
54
60
70
75
80
85
100
110
125
136
150
175
190
200
205
220
245
250
270
300
340
410
430
Breaker rated
current
(A)
16
16
20
20
25
25
32
40
50
63
63
80
80
100
100
100
125
125
125
160
160
200
200
250
250
300
300
300
300
400
400
400
500
500
630
630
4
5,5
7,5
9
10
11
15
18,5
22
25
30
33
37
40
45
51
55
59
63
75
80
90
100
110
132
140
147
150
160
180
185
200
220
250
300
315
The breakers which are used for
protection of capacitor circuits with
three phase and 400 V. (Ambient
temperature 40C)
Example :The main circuit breaker
has 2500 A rated current and 65 kA
short-circuit should be connected to
the main distribution panel of 1600
kVA transformer.
Note: Rated current of circuit breaker
for capacitive loading is to be
founded by multiplying with 1,5
coefficient of circuit breaker .
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1600
2000
2500
58
72
91
115
144
180
231
289
361
455
578
723
910
1156
1445
1805
2312
2912
3600
63
80
100
125
160
200
250
300
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
Power
(kVAr)
5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
80
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
500
550
600
Rated Current
(A)
7.6
15.2
22
29
36
43
58
72
87
115
144
216
288
361
433
505
577
722
793
866
Breaker rated
current (A)
16
25
40
63
80
100
100
125
125
160
200
300
400
500
630
800
800
1000
1250
1250
Capacitor
The breakers which are used at the
low voltage main distribution panels
distribution transformers :
(Medium voltage to 36kV)
Power
(kVAr)
Rated
Current
400 V (A)
Breaker rated
current
(40 C) In (A)
Transformer
Note : Breaker types should be suitable for motor protection.
Standards
Ambient temperature
Pollution degree
Altitude
Relative humidity
Fitting position (max)
C
m
IEC / EN 60947-2/1, VDE 0660
-20 and +60
III
2.000
%50 (40 C), %90 (20 C)
30
Technical Characteristics
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS
CIRCUIT BREAKER SELECTION TABLE CIRCUIT BREAKER SELECTION TABLE
VARIATION IN THERMAL ELEMENT SETTING CURRENTS ACCORDING TO AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
-2006
1/13
temperature for the breaker or the breaker should be
selected in accordance with operating current which is
described in the chart. If the breaker operates over calibrated
ambient temperature, it trips before rated values.
If the ambient temperature is lower than calibrated values,
the breaker trips after rated values.
The values in the chart show the maximum operating current,
as a function of ambient temperature of the breaker. If
ambient temperatures above the rated temperature, the
breaker will carry less than their continuous current rating.
So that rated current should be calibrated according to
ambient temperature by taking into consideration ambient
Efficiency of the ambient temperature on the rated
current of circuit breaker :
Example :
Maximum rated current of the F31 type circuit breaker with 100 A rated current which calibrated to 40 C is 95 A for an ambient
temperature of 50 C.
20C 30C 40C 60C 50C In(A)
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
200
200
250
300
400
500
630
800
300
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1600
2000
2500
3200
4000
5000
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers
Electronic Circuit Breakers
15,2
19,0
23,8
30,4
38,0
47,5
59,9
76,0
95,0
118,8
152,0
190,0
213,8
237,5
285,0
380,0
475,0
598,5
760,0
300,0
400,0
500,0
630,0
800,0
1000,0
1250,0
1600,0
2000,0
2500,0
3200,0
4000,0
5000,0
14,6
18,2
22,8
29,1
36,4
45,5
57,3
72,8
91,0
113,8
145,6
182,0
204,8
227,5
273,0
364,0
455,0
573,3
728,0
300,0
400,0
500,0
630,0
800,0
1000,0
1250,0
1600,0
2000,0
2500,0
3200,0
4000,0
5000,0
17,1
21,4
26,7
34,2
42,8
53,5
67,4
85,6
107,0
133,8
171,2
214,0
240.8
267.5
321.0
428.0
535.0
674.1
856.0
300,0
400,0
500,0
630,0
800,0
1000,0
1250,0
1600,0
2000,0
2500,0
3200,0
4000,0
5000,0
16,6
20,8
26,0
33,3
41,6
52,0
65,5
83,2
104,0
130,0
166,4
208,0
234,0
260,0
312,0
416,0
520,0
655,2
832,0
300,0
400,0
500,0
630,0
800,0
1000,0
1250,0
1600,0
2000,0
2500,0
3200,0
4000,0
5000,0
16,0
20,0
25,0
32,0
40,0
50,0
63,0
80,0
100,0
125,0
160,0
200,0
225,0
250,0
300,0
400,0
500,0
630,0
800,0
300,0
400,0
500,0
630,0
800,0
1000,0
1250,0
1600,0
2000,0
2500,0
3200,0
4000,0
5000,0
VARIATION IN THERMAL ELEMENT SETTING CURRENTS ACCORDING TO AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 1 1
-2006
1/14
Selectivity chart :
The selectivity chart may be used to determine the selectivity
table to be used for various transformer side and load side
devices.
1,5
I2 = Short circuit tripping current of circuit breaker (A)
Selectivity Limit :
I2 (on transformer side)
I2 (on load side )
In definition of selectivity means that; co-ordination of
automatic over-current protective devices in such a manner
that a fault appearing at a given point in a network is cleared
by the protective device installed immediately upstream of
the fault, and by that device alone. (Fig-10) For all fault
current values, from overloads up to the non-resistive short
circuit current, full selectivity exists if circuit breaker (A1)
opens and A2 remains closed. If the above contition is not
satisfied up to the full short circuit current, there is an partial
selectivity.
Selectivity contributes to continuity of service, a necessity
in many industrial, commercial or institutional installations.
Time selectivity :
Time selectivity is obtained by staggering the operating
times of circuit breakers equipped with short time delay trip
units. Selectivity is made by coinciding of C1 and C2 operating
curves and increasing the C1 breakers time adjustment
more then C2 breaker. Circuit breaker C1 must have an
electrodynamic withstand compatible with the short time
withstand current to which it is subjected during the short
time delay.
Delay (on transformer side) > Delay (on load side).
The spread of the current settings on circuit breakers B1
and B2 is generally proportional to their ratings, giving:
IB2 of B2 < IB1 of B1
Restricted selectivity is obtained for overcurrents less than
IB1 of B1. (Fig -11)
This selectivity can be significantly improved by the use of
a current limiting circuit breaker for B2. The limiting action
of B2 improves selectivity. Restricted selectivity with a
conventional breaker can be increased to full selectivity with
a current limiting circuit breaker. In this case B1 does not
open even for currents exceeding its setting IB1, since the
energy is limited by the operation of B2 and remains below
the no- trip energy of B1In this way full current selectivity is
obtained.
Current selectivity :
General :
Using of the selectivity chart :
: Indicates that, combinations providing selectivity. Within
this zones , there is never any interference between the
thermal and magnetic tripping curves of the transformer
side and load side circuit breakers.
The current value above which both protective devices open
simultaneously.
Fig-11
Fig-12
Fig-10
A
2
A
1
B
1
B
2
t
IB
1
IB
2
I
only B2 opens B1 and B2 open
B
1
B
2
Load
C
1
C
2
t
I
C
1
C
2
Load
Only
C2 opens
C1 and
C2 open
Fig-13
10000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30x100 A
Current
T
i
m
e

(
s
n
)
1
Current selectivite (Overload protection)
F31
100 A
F51
250 A
SELECTIVITY SELECTIVITY
-2006 1/15
Transformer
Side In (A)
F21-F22/ F31-F32-F33
Standard
Protection
Circuit
Breaker
F10-F11
F12
F21-F22
F31-F32-F33
Motor
Protection
Circuit
Breaker
F10-F11
F12
F21-F22
F31-F32-F33
Generator
Protection
Circuit
Breaker
F10-F11
F12
F21-F22
F31-F32-F33
16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 200 250 300 400 500 630 800
200 250 300 500 640 800 1000 1280 1600 2000 2500 2400 3200 4000 5040 6400
16
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
200
16
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
200
16
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
200
F51-F52-F53 F61-F62/F71/F82-F83/F82E-F83E
Example :
If Rated current on transformer side = 100 A
Using of rated current of downstream (on load side) circuit breaker should be ;
For standard protection : up to 63 A.
For motor protection : up to 40 A.
For generator protection : up to 80 A.
Selectivity limit (A) 160
Standard Protection Circuit Breaker
400
Load side
I1 (A)
SELECTIVITY SELECTIVITY 1 1
-2006 1/16
Load side
I1 (A)
Transformer
side In
(A)
Motor
Protection
Circuit
Breaker
F51-F52-F53
F61-F62
F71
F82-F83
200
250
300
400
500
630
800
200
250
300
400
500
630
800
200
250
300
400
500
630
800
Standard Protection
Circuit
Breaker
F51-F52-F53
F61-F62
F71
F82-F83
Generator
Protection
Circuit
BreakerF51-F52-F53
F61-F62
F71
F82-F83
F51-F52-F53 F61-F62/F71/F82-F83/F82E-F83E F91E-F92E
F101E-F102E
F111E-F112E
2500 2400 3200 4000 5040 6400 10000 12500 16000 25000 2000 20000
200 250 300 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2500 2000
Selectivity limit (A)
Load side
I1 (A)
Transformer
side In
(A)
Motor Protection
Circuit Breaker
F51-F52-F53
F61-F62
F71
F82-F83
F82E-F83E
200
250
300
400
500
630
800
200
250
300
400
500
630
800
200
250
300
400
500
630
800
Standard Protection
Circuit Breaker
F51-F52-F53
F61-F62
F71
F82-F83
F82E-F83E
Generator Protection
Circuit Breaker
F51-F52-F53
F61-F62
F71
F82-F83
F82E-F83E
F51 F61-F62/F71/F82-F83 F91E-F92E
F101E-F102E
F112E
3000 3600 4800 6000 7560 9600 10000 12500 16000 25000 2400 20000
200 250 300 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2500 2000
Selectivity limit (A)
Motor protection circuit breakers
Standard protection circuit breakers
SELECTIVITY SELECTIVITY
1/17
-2006
Detailed determination at any one point :
Part of
installation
Resistance
(m)
Reactances
(m)
network
side
transformer
R1=Z1 x cos x 10
-3
cos =0.15
X1=Z1 x sin x 10
-3
sin =0.98
R2=
Pc x U
2
S
2
x10
-3
Pc=cupper loss (W)
S=apparent power of
transformer (kVA)
k=56 (Cu) or 36 (AI)
k=
m
mm
2
bars
circuit breaker
R4 negligible
cables
(1)
X4 negligible
X2=
Z2
2
-R2
2
Z2=
Usc
100
x
U
2
S
X3=0.07L (3 phase cables)
X3=0.15L (Mono phase cables)
L : Length of cable (m)
S : section of cable (mm
2
)
X3=0.15 L
Part of
installation
Resistance
(m)
Reactances
(m)
Diagram
network side
P1=500 MVA
R1=
400
2
500
x 0.15x10
-3
R1=0.05 m
transformer
S=800 kVA
Usc=%6
U=400 V
Pc=9700 W
R2=
9700x400
2
x10
-3
800
2
R2=2.42 m
Connection cables
transformers to
circuit breaker
2 ( 3x240 ) mm
2
per phase
L=4 m
R3=
4x10
3
56x240x2
R3=0.14 m
Circuit breaker R4=0
Connection CB
to outgoing
line no 2 (Al)
10x80 mm
2
per phase
L=3 m
R5=
3x10
3
36x800
R5=0.10 m
Circuit breakers R6=0
Connection
(cables)
main LV
switcboard
( 3x185 mm
2
)
copper per phase
L= 70 m
R7=
70x10
3
56x185
R7=6.75 m
X1=
400
2
500
x 0.98 x10
-3
X1=0.31 m
X2=
6
100
X2=11.75 m
400
2
800
x - (2.42)
2
X3=
4
2
X3=0.14 m
0.07 x
X4=0
X5=0.15 x 3
X5=0.45 m
X6=0
X7=0.07 x 70
X7=4.9 m
Calculation of short - circuit currents (kA)
Resistances
(m)
M1
M2
M3
Rt1=R1+R2+R3
Rt1=2.61
Rt2=Rt1+R4+R5
Rt2=2.71
Rt3=Rt2+R6+R7
Rt3=9.46
Xt1=X1+X2+X3
Xt1=12.2
Xt2=Xt1+X4+X5
Xt2=12.65
Xt3=Xt2+X6+X7
Xt3=17.55
Reactances
(m)
3
400
(2.61
2
+12.2
2
)
=18.52kA
3
400
(2.71
2
+12.65
2
)
=17.86kA
3
400
(9.46
2
+17.55
2
)
=11.58kA
2
(1)
If there are several cables in parallel per phase, divide the resistance
and reactance of one cable by the number of cables.
Z1=
U
2
P1
(network impedance of interconnect system)
Z2= Impedance of transformer
Short circuit current
(kA)
R3=
L
k.S
R3=
L
k.S
L : Length of bar (m)
S : Section of bar (mm
2
)
k=56 (Cu) or 36 (AI)
k=
m
mm
2
x10
3
x10
3
Table showing the maximum short circuit current of a distribution transformer during under load conductions :
Sn : Rated power of transformer (kVA)
In : Rated current of transformer (A)
Un : Output voltage between phases of the transformer
under onloaded condition (V)
Usc : Short circuit voltage of transformer (%)
Isc : Maximum short circuit current of secondary side of
the transformer with 3 phase (A).
Example :
Rated power of transformer = 1250 kVA ( Un: 400 V, Usc: %6)
Isc : ?
Isc =

S x 100
1,73 x Un x Usc
Isc=

In x 100
Usc
or
Isc=

630 x 100
= 20207 A.
1,73 x 400 x 6
Short circuit current determination at any one point of line :
Rt: Total resistance (m)
Xt: Total reactance (m)
Isc=
Un
3. Rt
2
+ Xt
2
(kA)
1283
1603
2020
2566
3207
4009
5132
6415
8019
10103
12830
16038
20207
19245
24057
30071
38491
48113
60142
Short circuit
current for
3 phase
Isc (rms A)
Short circuit
voltage
Usc (%)
4,5
4,5
4,5
4,5
4,5
4,5
4,5
4,5
4,5
4,5
4,5
4,5
4,5
6
6
6
6
6
6
Rated
current
In (A)
58
72
91
115
144
180
231
289
361
455
578
723
910
1156
1445
1805
2312
2900
3600
Transformer
power
Sn (kVA)
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1600
2000
2500
M1
main
switcboard
1 2 3
M2
M3 secondary
switchboard
DETERMINATION OF SHORT - CIRCUIT CURRENT DETERMINATION OF SHORT - CIRCUIT CURRENT 1 1
Isc=20 kA
Isc=?
70 m.
95 mm
2
Cu
Example :
In the 380 V switchboard, choose on the line corresponding
to cable cross-section Cu area : 95mm
2
the nearest lower
value to the cable length: 67m. The crossing of this column
with the line which corresponds to the nearest higher value
of the network short circuit current :22kA, gives the required
short circuit current value :11 kA.
415 V 380 V
14
14
13
13
13
13
13
13
12
12
11
11
9
7
5
4
3
2
3
4
7
11
18
25
35
49
67
84
91
108
136
168
10
10
10
10
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
7
6
5
4
3
2
3
4
6
10
16
25
35
50
70
95
120
130
154
192
240
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
4
3
3
4
6
9
15
24
38
53
75
105
143
180
195
231
283
360
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
3
5
8
12
20
32
50
70
100
140
190
240
260
308
284
480
Isc
Network
(kA)
cable
(mm
2
)
Cu
1,5
2,5
4
6
10
16
25
35
50
70
95
120
150
185
240
300
100
90
80
70
60
50
45
40
35
30
25
22
15
10
7
5
4
AI
1
1
2
3
4
5
7
10
12
13
15
19
24
65
62
58
52
47
41
38
35
31
27
23
21
14
10
7
5
4
4
5
8
11
14
18
20
23
28
36
51
49
47
44
40
36
34
32
28
25
22
20
14
10
7
5
4
3
5
7
10
14
19
24
26
30
38
48
42
41
39
37
35
32
30
28
26
23
20
19
13
9
7
5
4
1
2
3
5
8
11
15
21
29
36
39
46
57
72
30
29
29
28
27
25
24
23
21
20
18
18
12
9
6
5
4
2
3
5
8
13
18
25
35
48
60
65
77
96
120
19
19
18
18
18
17
17
16
16
15
14
13
11
8
6
5
4
Length of cable (m)
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
2
2
3
5
8
13
20
32
50
70
120
151
190
240
260
308
384
480
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
4
3
2
2
4
6
9
15
24
38
53
89
113
143
180
195
231
288
360
3
4
6
10
16
25
35
60
75
95
120
130
154
192
240
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
7
7
7
6
6
4
3
3
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
10
10
10
10
8
7
5
4
3
1
2
3
4
7
11
17
24
42
53
66
84
91
107
134
168
20
20
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
12
12
10
8
6
4
3
1
2
3
5
8
13
18
30
38
48
60
65
77
96
120
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
20
20
20
17
12
10
6
4
4
1
2
3
5
8
11
18
23
29
36
39
46
57
72
40
35
35
35
35
30
30
30
25
25
20
20
15
10
6
5
4
1
2
3
5
7
12
15
19
24
26
30
38
48
cable
(mm
2
)
Cu
Isc
Network
(kA)
100
90
80
70
60
50
45
40
35
30
25
22
15
10
7
5
4
1,5
2,5
4
6
10
16
25
35
50
70
95
120
150
185
240
300
45
45
45
40
40
35
35
30
30
25
25
22
15
10
7
5
4
2
4
5
9
11
14
18
19
23
28
36
AI Length of cable (m)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
5
8
12
19
30
48
75
105
179
226
285
360
391
462
576
720
2,5
4
6
10
16
25
35
50
70
120
150
185
240
300
Isc
on load side (kA)
Isc
on load side (kA)
2,5
4
6
10
16
25
35
50
70
120
150
185
240
300
Determination of short - circuit current at a any point:
The tables below show us the evolution of the short circuit current at a point in the network when the short circuit
current network, constution and length of the cable are known.
1/18
-2006
DETERMINATION OF SHORT - CIRCUIT CURRENT DETERMINATION OF SHORT - CIRCUIT CURRENT
ACCESSORIES FOR THE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ACCESSORIES FOR THE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1/19
-2006
Pic-2 Electronic Ground Fault Relay
Pic-3 Toroidal transformer
Pic-4 Auxiliary Contact Block
F31-F32
F33
F51-F52
F53
F71 F92E
Auxiliary Contact Block :
The auxiliary contact block is mechanically actuated by
circuit breakers operating mechanism. It is used for remote
signalling and electrical interlocking purposes. One contact
block has 1NO+1NC contacts. Auxiliary contact blocks can
be retrofitted by customer without opening breaker front
cover in model F21 and F83E. For all other models, it must
be factory fi tted and cannot be fi tted on si te.
NO: Normally opening contact
NC: Normally closing contact
Please order according to following table.
Toroidal transformer :
All the phases and neutral lines are passed throught the
torodial transformers. If a current exists in the system, the
equvalent of input and output currents will be changed. So,
a difference current passes through the toroidal winding.
And this difference current is eveluated by the electronic
ground fault relay.
Type
Ground current setting
Order code
Trip time setting
Power supply
Output relay
Reset
FGR-05R
30-500 mA
8AT-N0000-0500
0,1 - 2,0 sn
110 / 220 V AC 50/60 Hz
3 A, 250 V AC
Manual / Electrical (Remote)
FGR-10R
100-1000 mA
8AT-N0000-1000
FGR-25R
200-2500 mA
8AT-N0000-2500
Electronic Ground Fault Relays :
When a current is perceived from the sign which is coming
from the torodial transformer, electronic ground fault relay
provides to open the circuit breaker with the low voltage coil.
Toroidal Diameter (mm)
60 mm
110 mm
160 mm
210 mm
Order Codes
8AT-R0000-0060
8AT-R0000-0110
8AT-R0000-0160
8AT-R0000-0210
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
2 2
1 1
2 2
1 1
2 2
1 1
2 2
1 1
2 2
Contact Position
NO NC
Rated
Voltage
250 V~
250 V~
250 V~
400 V~
400 V~
400 V~
400 V~
400 V~
400 V~
400 V~
400 V~
400 V~
400 V~
400 V~
Rated
Current
2 A
2 A
2 A
4 A
4 A
4 A
4 A
4 A
4 A
4 A
4 A
4 A
4 A
4 A
Type
F31-F32-F33
F71
F82-F83/F82E-F83E
F92E
F101E-F102E
Order Codes
8AA-A0011-0000
8AB-A0011-0000
8AD-A0011-0000
8AP-A0011-0000
8AF-A0011-0000
8AF-A0022-0000
8AG-A0011-0000
8AG-A0022-0000
8AH-A0011-0000
8AH-A0022-0000
8AI-A0011-0000
8AI-A0022-0000
8AK-A0011-0000
8AK-A0022-0000
F21-F22
F51-F52-F53
DC, ~ AC, DC-AC
F61-F62
F111E-F112E
1 1
-2006
1/20
Shunt Trip Release :
The shunt trip release provides remote control tripping of the
circuit breaker. It consists of an intermittent rated solenoid. When
the breaker is in closed position (ON), if voltage applies to opening
relay, breaker comes to trip position. According to standardization,it
is guaranteed that shunt releases operate between 70 % -110%
of the rated voltage. The tripping device is energized by AC or
DC voltage which is shown on the table.
8AF-BA000-0110
8AF-BA000-0220
8AF-BA000-0380
8AF-BD000-0024
8AF-BD000-0048
8AF-BD000-0110
8AF-BD000-0220
8AK-BA000-0110
8AK-BA000-0220
8AK-BA000-0380
8AK-BD000-0024
8AK-BD000-0048
8AK-BD000-0110
8AK-BD000-0220
8AG-BA000-0110
8AG-BA000-0220
8AG-BA000-0380
8AG-BD000-0024
8AG-BD000-0048
8AG-BD000-0110
8AG-BD000-0220
8AB-BA000-0110
8AB-BA000-0220
8AB-BA000-0380
8AB-BD000-0024
8AB-BD000-0048
8AB-BD000-0110
8AB-BD000-0220
Order Codes :
Operating
voltage
8AA-BA000-0110
8AA-BA000-0220
8AA-BA000-0380
8AA-BD000-0024
8AA-BD000-0048
8AA-BD000-0110
8AA-BD000-0220
8AH-BA000-0110
8AH-BA000-0220
8AH-BA000-0380
8AH-BD000-0024
8AH-BD000-0048
8AH-BD000-0110
8AH-BD000-0220
8AD-BA000-0110
8AD-BA000-0220
8AD-BA000-0380
8AD-BD000-0024
8AD-BD000-0048
8AD-BD000-0110
8AD-BD000-0220
Pic-6 Undervoltage Release
Pic-5 Shunt Trip Release
F31-F32-F33 F51-F52-F53 F71
110 V ~
220 V ~
380 V ~
24 V
48 V
110 V
220 V
F21-F22 F31-F32-F33 F51-F52-F53 F71 F82-F83
F82E-F83E
F92E F111E-F112E
Undervoltage Release:
The function of undervoltage release is opening of the circuit
breaker if energy breaks or voltage falls below under the operating
voltage of 70%Voltage should be equal or above from 85% of
operating voltage value circuit breaker has not restored for
undervoltage release is under the energise continuously.
Note : Circuit breaker with built-in under voltage release cant be switched on, if there is no supply voltage.
< 154 V
< 266 V
< 154 V
< 266 V
< 154 V
< 266 V
< 154 V
< 275 V
< 154 V
< 275 V
< 154 V
< 275 V
< 154 V
< 275 V
< 154 V
< 275 V
< 154 V
< 275 V
> 187 V~
> 323 V~
> 187 V~
> 323 V~
> 187 V~
> 323 V~
> 187 V~
> 323 V~
> 187 V~
> 323 V~
> 187 V~
> 323 V~
> 187 V~
> 323 V~
> 187 V~
> 323 V~
> 187 V~
> 323 V~
220 V~
380 V~
220 V~
380 V~
220 V~
380 V~
220 V~
380 V~
220 V~
380 V~
220 V~
380 V~
220 V~
380 V~
220 V~
380 V~
220 V~
380 V~
8AA-CA000-0220
8AA-CA000-0380
8AB-CA000-0220
8AB-CA000-0380
8AD-CA000-0220
8AD-CA000-0380
8AP-CA000-0220
8AP-CA000-0380
8AF-CA000-0220
8AF-CA000-0380
8AG-CA000-0220
8AG-CA000-0380
8AH-CA000-0220
8AH-CA000-0380
8AI-CA000-0220
8AI-CA000-0380
8AK-CA000-0220
8AK-CA000-0380
F21-F22
F31-F32-F33
F51-F52-F53
F61-F62
F71
F82-F83/F82E-F83E
F91E-F92E
F101E-F102E
F111E-F112E
Trip voltage Operating voltage Rated voltage Type Order codes
ACCESSORIES FOR THE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
-2006
1/21
ACCESSORIES FOR THE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Motor operating mechanism :
The function of the motor control mechanism is to provide
complete remote operating by opening and closing of a circuit
breaker. Beside the handle mechanism on the breaker is devices
F61/F71/F82-F83/F82E-F83E/F91E-F92E
Motor operating mechanism
Technical specification :
Order Code
Rated voltage
Power
Opening time
Closed time
8AF-DA000-0220
220 V AC *
100 W
4 s
3.5 s
Extended Rotary Handle :
They are used to external manual operation when circuit breaker
is installed inside the switch board.
Order Code
8AB-G000-0000
8AD-G000-0000
8AF-G000-0000
8AG-G000-0000
F31-F32-F33
F51-F52-F53
F82-F83/F82E-F83E
F91E-F92E
Type
Lock mechanisms prevent the breaker to opening and closed
at the trip position by switching mechanically. So breakers
supply service environment under the security by preventing
use by unauthorised personnel.
Lock Mechanism with Key :
Order Code
8AM-E0000-0000
8AA-E0000-0000
8AB-E0000-0000
8AD-E000-0000
8AF-E0000-0000
8AG-E0000-0000
8AH-E0000-0000
F10-F11/F12
F21-F22
F31-F32-F33
F51-F52-F53
F71
F82-F83/F82E-F83E
F91E-F92E
Type
For dimensions inspect page 34, for circuit diagram inspect page 27.
* There can be different operating voltages (AC-DC) for orders.
F101E-F102E/F111E-F112E Motor operating mechanism
Order Code
Rated voltage
Power
Opening time
Closed time
8AK-DA000-0220
220 V AC *
500 W
1.5 s
1.5 s
F31-F32-F33/F51-F52-F53 Motor operating mechanism :
Order Code
Rated voltage
Power
Opening time
Closed time
8AD-DA000-0220
220 V AC *
100 W
1 s
1 s
Pic-7
F31-F32-F33/F51-F52-F53 Motor operating mechanism
F21-F22 F71
Pic-11
Lock Mechanism with Key
Pic-10
F31-F32-F33 Extended Rotary Handle
Pic-8
F71/F82-F83/F82E-F83E/F92E Motor operating mechanism
that allow an operator to opening and closing as a
mechanically of circuit breaker. Motor operating mechanism
is installed to upper side of cover of the breaker. Motor
operating mechanism has mechanical locking mechanism.
Pic-9
F111E-F112E Motor operating mechanism
1 1
-2006
1/22
Extension Bars (EB) :
Extension bars are used for easily and reliable connections of cable or bar with breakers terminals.
Fig-14
Connection terminals: Screw head or allian head can be manufactured upon request.
Quantity
of cable
1
1
1
1
Cross section
of cable (mm
2
)
2.5...50
2,5...95
2,5...95
95...120
Diameter of
cable (mm)
6
12
12
13
Squeeze
force (Nm)
6
10
6
25
Type of
screw
Screw
Allian
Screw
Allian
Quantity
3
3
3
3
Type
F10-F11/F12
F21-F22/F31-F32-F33
F21-F22/F31-F32-F33
F51-F52-F53
Terminal Cover :
The cover supplies security insulation against touching with hand to the part of terminal
(bar or cable). Cover isolates terminal by passing to channel between the poles. So
interference by unauthorised personnel is prevented. (Pic-12)
Pic-12 Terminal protection cover
Pic-13 Connection terminals
F10...F112E
Order Code
8AM-F0000-0000
8AR-F0000-0000
8AA-F0000-0000
8AB-F0000-0000
8AD-F0000-0000
8AP-F0000-0000
F10-F11
F12
F21-F22
F31-F32-F33
F51-F52-F53
F61-F62
Type
Note: Connection terminal of F31-F32-F33 type circuit breaker can be manufactured as allian or screw head upon request.
Order Code
8AF-F0000-0000
8AG-F0000-0000
8AH-F0000-0000
8AI-F0000-0000
8AK-F0000-0000
F71
F82-F83/F82E-F83E
F91E-F92E
F101E-F102E
F111E-F112E
Type
F71
F82-F83
F82E-F83E
F31-F32-F33
F51-F52-F53
8AM-H1000-0125
8AA-H2000-0100
8AB-H2000-0125
8AD-H2001-0250
8AE-H2000-0300
8AF-H2000-0300
8AF-H3000-0500
8AG-H5000-0630
8AG-H7000-0800
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
16 A - 125 A
16 A - 125 A
125 - 160 A
200 A - 250 A
250 A - 400 A
300 A
400 A - 500 A
630 A
800 A
10
10
10
25
25
40
40
40
40
M8
M8
M8
M12
M10
M10
M10
M10
M10
3
3
5
5
8
5
6
8
12
14
18
18
25
38
40
40
40
40
36
16
35
35
42
31
31
31
31
F10-F11/F12
F61-F62
F21-F22
F21-F22/F31-F32-F33 F61-F62 F51-F52-F53 F71/F82/F82E-F83E
L
N
S Phase R,T Phase
4
3
.
5
10.5
2
3
.
5
N
L
S Phase R,T Phase
L
2
1
S Phase R,T Phase
N
L
2
9
1
9
4
2
1
3
.
5
N
L
S Phase R,T Phase
N
L
9
R, S, T Phase
F10-F11/F12
F10-F11/F12
Screw head Allian head
F51-F52-F53
Allian head Star head
F21-F22 / F31-F32-F33 F61-F62
Allian head
Type
Order codes
Quantity
(piece)
Rated
current (A)
Squeeze force
(Nm)
Screw
dimension ()
Thickness
P (mm)
Width
N (mm)
Length
L (mm)
AUTOMATIC INVERSER SYSTEM AUTOMATIC INVERSER SYSTEM
Building of a Network-Generator automation namely
automatic inverser system is very easy nd important. Because
if a fault occurs it causes in the system that, network and
generator are in the system at the same time and occur a
short-circuit.
-2006
1/23
Generator is very important for the systems that meet energy
breaking very often or breaking energy cause of big harmful.
Even generator is used, switch on generator may be take
minutes by authorized personnel manually. Generator which
is switched on manually, switch off after the system energize
and then feeding the system from network, switch of network
switch on. This cause time and work loss. Solution of this
problem is switch on generator during the breaking of energize
and switch off generator after the system energize by network-
generator automation.
Network-Generator Inverter Relay
It is used for automatic passing between network generator in
the system that two circuit breaker is used for inverser purpose.
On the screen, state of line, feeding, swich can be watched.
Connection of alarm and shunt trip release can be provided
with fault contact.
Output Contacts : 250V AC, 10A
Feeding Voltage : 12V AC
Input Voltage : 220 V AC
Order Code : 9H5-D0000-0000
Dimensions : 96x96 mm
Pic-14
Fig-16: Connection diagram of F71/F82-F83/F82E-F83E/F91E-F92E/F101E-F102E/F111E-F112E type circuit breaker
with motor mechanism for inverser automation system.
3
2
1
0
4
3
b2 OFF
b3 ON
4
3
3
2
1
0
4
3
b2 OFF
b3 ON
4
3
Fig-15: Connection diagram of F31-F32-F33/F51-F52-F53 type circuit breaker with motor mechanism for inverser automation system.
Auxiliary
Contact
Auxiliary
Contact
MOTOR of
GENERATOR
BREAKER
MOTOR of
NETWORK
BREAKER
5
4
3
2
1
0
4 3 2 1
2 1 4 3
K1
1
2
K2 1 2
K1
4
3
K2
4
3
A1 A2
K1
A1 A2
K2
b1
ON
b2
OFF
5
4
3
2
1
0
Neutral
Phase
4 3 2 1
2 1 4 3
K1
1
2
K21 2
K1
4
3
K2
4
3
A1 A2
K1
A1 A2
K2
b1
ON
b2
OFF
Generator panel connector no. 40
Network-Generator
Inverter Relay
Neutral
12V
Alarm Output
Phase
Neutral
Phase
Neutral
12V
MOTOR of
NETWORK
BREAKER Alarm Output
Phase
Phase
Neutral
Phase
Neutral
Network-Generator
Inverter Relay
Auxiliary
Contact
MOTOR of
GENERATOR
BREAKER
13 14
Auxiliary
Contact
13 14
13 14 13 14
Network-Generator Automation (Inverser System)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13
1 1
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM of MOTOR OPERATING MECHANISM
-2006
1/24
Motor control mechanism for F111E-F112E type circuit breakers
Fig-19
0123
4 4
3 3 b2
OFF
b3
ON
Motor operating mechanism for F31-F32-F33/F51-F52-F53 type circuit breakers
Fig-17
K1 K2
S2
4
S1
3
2 1
K1
K2
K1
K2
ON b1
Closing
2A
5
KD
220V ~
( )
R
A2
A1
A2
A1
3
4
0
1
OFF b2
Opening
1
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
3
4
13
14
13
14
21
22
V
2 3 4
NEUTRAL
Terminal connection diagram
K1
Opening
contactor
1
3
1
3
5
13
2
4
6
14
K2
Closing
contactor
2
4
1
3
5
13
2
4
6
14
OFF
Opening
b2
2A
ON
Closing
b3
1 2 3
3
4
3
4
K1 K2 b0
OFF
Opening
K2 K1
R 5 L 6
0
220V ~
R
5 1 2 3 4 6
K2
K1
S1
K1
K2
S2
b1
ON
Closing
S3
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
3
4
21
22
21
22
21
22
21
22
13
14
A1
A2
A1
A2
K2
3
6
1
3
5
21
2
4
6
22
2
K1
1
5
1
3
5
21
2
4
6
22
4
Fig-18
Motor operating mechanism for F71/F82-F83/F82E-F83E/F91E-F92E type circuit breakers
0123
4 4
3
3 b2
OFF
b3
ON
Neutral Phase
2A
3
4
2
OFF
b2
Shunt
Trip
ON
b3
Shunt
Trip
3
4
K2 K1
3
4
1
2
K2 K1
1
2
13
14
S2
KD
V
K1
A1
A2
K2
A1
A2
0
21
22
S1
220V ~
R
3
4
3
3
4
3
4
1
Opening Closing
b0
NEUTRAL
b1
K2
Closing
contactor
2
4
1
3
5
13
2
4
6
14
K1
Opening
contactor
1
3
1
3
5
13
2
4
6
14
13
14
012345
Neutral Phase
4
3
2
1
2
1
4
3
K1
1
2
K2
1
2
K1
4
3
K2
4
3
A1
A2
K1
A1
A2
K2
b1
ON
b2
OFF
: Terminals
b1 : Opening button (Used by the authorizhed person)
b2 : Closed button
S1 : Motor mechanism switching limit
S2 : Electrical and mechanical locking switch against the breaker closed
K1 : Opening contactor
K2 : Closed contactor
KD : Bridge diot
V : Varistor (250 V AC)
: Motor mechanism limit
: Users connections
: Terminals
b0 : Opening button
b1 : Closing button
b2 : Shunt trip OFF button (Used by the authorizhed person)
b3 : Shunt trip ON button (Used by the authorizhed person)
S1 : Limiting switch
S2 : Electrical and Mechanical locking switch
K1 : Opening contactor (Auxiliary contactor)
K2 : Closing contactor (Auxiliary contactor)
KD : Bridge diot
V : Varistor (250 V AC)
: Users connections
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM of MOTOR OPERATING MECHANISM
: Terminals
b0 : Opening button
b1 : Closing button
b2 : Shunt trip OFF button (Used by the authorizhed person)
b3 : Shunt trip ON button (Used by the authorizhed person)
S1 : Under limiting switch
S2 : Upper limiting switch
S3 : Electrical and Mechanical locking switch
K1 : Opening contactor (FC-09D01)
K2 : Closing contactor (FC-09D01)
R : Motor end which will move the circuit breakers operating handle forward.
L : Motor end which will move the circuit breakers operating handle backward.
: Users connections
Neutral Phase
Closing
contactor
Opening
contactor
NEUTRAL
TIME CURRENT CURVES of CIRCUIT BREAKERS
-2006
1/25
TIME CURRENT CURVES of CIRCUIT BREAKERS
10000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30xIn
a
40 C
%20
b
10000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30xIn
c
40 C
%20
Fig-20
xIn Current
T
i
m
e

(
s
e
c
.
)
F01-F02/F10-F11/F12/F21-F22/F31-F32-F33
Thermal magnetic type circuit breaker
Fig-21
xIn Current
T
i
m
e

(
s
e
c
.
)
F51-F52-F53/F61-F62/F71
F82E-F83E/F91E-F92E/F101E-F102E/F111E-F112E
Electronic type circuit breaker
10000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30xIn
%20
10000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30xIn
40 C
%20
Fig-22
xIn Current
F82-F83
T
i
m
e

(
s
e
c
.
)
T
i
m
e

(
s
e
c
.
)
xIn Current
Fig-23
a: F01-F02 / F21-F22 / F31-F32-F33
b: F10-F11 / F12
d
c: F51-F52-F53
d: F61-F62-F71
1 1
DIMENSIONS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS
F01 - F02 Type :
-2006
1/26
40
27
7
1
1
6
9
3
4
6
4
82
87
108.5
30
5
1
5
2
Installation holes dimensions
Installation screw dimension : M4x60
1
6
9
27
7
1
Panel front section
F10 - F11 Type :
a) Terminal cover
b) Phase separator
2
9
.
5
4
0
1
7
1
1
2
0
5
2
2
5
.
5
67
69.5
75
90
1
7
1
76
a b
1
2
0
1
0
0
26.5
14
25 25
76
b
5
2
6
9
2
0
14
25 25
R8
Without terminal cover With terminal cover
-2006
1/27
F12 Type :
2
9
.
5
4
3
30
6
9
.
5
2
6
.
5
15 30
R7
a) Trip button
b) Phase separator
c) Terminal cover
d) Thermal adjustment knob
30
1
2
0
1
0
0
5
1
90
15 30 30
b
a
90
1
7
1
c
1
7
0
5
1
2
5
.
5
68
70.5
77
90
b
d
With terminal cover
F21 - F22 Type :
a) Trip button
b) Thermal adjustment knob
c) Extention bar
d) Phase separator
e) Terminal cover Installation screw dimension: M4X60
22
19.5
58
74
79
93
2
6
3
.
3
26.5
c
4
5
.
5
37.5
93
1
5
5
.
7
8
8
.
5
3
3
.
4
a
b
d
18
2
5
e
1
7
6
90.7 65.5
1
8 3
3
30
6
4
17
R
7
.5
89
R
1
91.5
93.5
9
0
1
2
0
1
4
0
102.5
64.5
Panel Mounting Frame
With terminal cover
5
1
3
2
30
Installation holes
dimensions
1 1
F51 - F52 - F53 Type :
a) Trip button
c) Magnetic adjustment knob
d) Extention bar
e) Phase separator
f) Terminal cover
With terminal cover
3
2
7
25
d
a
b
c
2
5
6
105 (3 poles)
40.75
1
1
0
e
7
5
7
0
29.5
4
8
.
3
105.5
113.5
135.15
28.5
3
8
3
1
1
0
R10.75
4
1
.
2
5
33.75
105 (3 poles)
3
4
105 (3 poles)
2
6
1
105.5
f
1
0
4
.
5
118
80
107
109
1
6
2
1
1
2
1
4
2
R
3
25
140 (4 poles)
140 (4 poles)
140 (4 poles)
35
2
3
0
6
1/28
-2006
F31 - F32 - F33 Type :
a) Trip button
c) Extention bar
d) Phase separator
e) Terminal cover
With terminal cover
e
106
2
4
.
2
5
115.2
90.5
1
6
5
3
0
106
34
R 10
8
9
35
1
4
6
.
5
5
Installation holes
dimensions
1
5
2
118
80
107.5
109
1
0
2
1
3
2
R
3
a
b
c
d
18
1
6
5
41.5
101
1
0
0
3
6
2
3
5
18
4
4
14
115.2
90.5
1
2
0
.
5
3
1
0
21
98.5
1
0
0
-2006
1/29
With terminal cover
F71 Type :
a) Trip button
b) Thermal magnetic adjustment switch
c) Extention bar
d) Phase separator
e) Terminal cover
f ) Handle Extension
F61 - F62 Type :
a) Trip button
c) Magnetic adjustment knob
d) Extention bar
e) Terminal cover
3
6
1
0
9
60
50
Handle Extension
80
1
1
0
2
7
0
195.5
3
3
9
50 40
106.5
113
240
210
3
2
2
7
5
109
a
b
c
d
f
e
6
70
2
3
6
3
9
5
70
3
1
35 70
1
0
7
.
5 R25
210
15.5
123.5
148
7
4
7
4
105
1
1
0
With terminal cover
3
6
1
0
9
60
50
Handle Extension
38
3
4
0
2
5
6
40
5
5
.
6
1
1
0
6
9
7
9
140
43 36
1
1
0
103
115
241
2
6
1
4
1
.
2
5
142 103
142
27.7 43.3 43.3 27.7
R13.5
5
8
.
5
1
0
0
.
5
140
44.5
2
5
6
1
9
4
9
118
80
107
109
1
6
2
1
1
2
1
4
2
R
3
a
c
d
b
e
f
1 1
-2006
1/30
F82 - F83/F82E - F83E Type :
a) Trip button
c) Extention bar
d) Phase separator
e) Terminal cover
F91E - F92E Type :
a) Trip button
c) Extention bar
d) Phase seperator
e) Terminal cover
With terminal cover
With terminal cover
79.8
210
a
c
2
8
0
f
240
d
2
8
6
3
2
210 108
70
3
1
35 70
1
0
7
.
5 R25
2
4
9
70
6.5
50
3
6
0
1
1
0
b
e
210
1
0
9
3
6
60
50
4
0
8
112
40
8
0
6
0
.
5
22
121
155
1
1
0
105
Handle Extension
50
1
0
9
3
6
60
a
3
7
0
c
210
1
1
0
70
121.8
136.5
256
f
5
2
2
b
d
70
9
210
3
7
0
3
3
8
4
9
5
45 45
3
7
6
3
3
210
27.5
121.8
R23.5
210
1
2
1
35
e
70 70
1
1
0
1
1
5
1
4
5
45
5
8
105
Handle Extension
118
80
107
109
1
6
2
1
1
2
1
4
2
R
3
118
80
107
109
1
6
2
1
1
2
1
4
2
R
3
DIMENSIONS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS DIMENSIONS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1 1
-2006
1/31
F101E - F102E Type :
a) Trip button
c) Extention bar
d) Phase separator
e) Terminal cover
F111E - F112E Type :
80
5
8
1
5
3
22.5
a) Trip button
c) Extention bar
d) Phase separator
e) Terminal cover
304
a
4
1
2
6
3
4
1
7
5
b
c
76 76
1
1
2
1
2
5
1
2
7
115
65
265
438
250.5
f
44.5
54
1
7
5
2
8
4
250.5
4
1
7
6
6
.
5
392
e
1
6
5
.
5
342
With terminal cover
2
2
8
3
8
6
367.5
11
Handle Extension
R
3
135
90
117
2
3
5
2
0
7
1
7
7
Pano Montaj
erevesi
With terminal cover
5
7
0
3
7
1
105
1
3
9
1
0
0
4
7
7
1
1
0
45 25
3
2
1
5
40
151
170
215
22
1
5
2
3
9
4
1
1
5
1
297
210
3
3
8
70
210
50
60
70
1
5
1
70
1
0
9
3
6
c
a
b
d
e
DIMENSIONS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS DIMENSIONS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1/32
-2006
F111E - F112E Motor Control Mechanism :
F71/F82 - F83/F82E - F83E/F91E - F92E/F101E - F102E Motor Control Mechanism :
F31 - F32 - F33/F51 - F52 - F53 Motor Control Mechanism :
300
4
1
7
230
392
4
1
2
250.5 119.5
3
7
6
1
4
7
210 122
97
150
142
32
105 105.5
125
119
15.5
77
1
3
4
2
6
1
CONTENTS CONTENTS
AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
General Technical Characteristics of Air Circuit Breakers
Technical Characteristics of Air Circuit Breakers
Connection Diagram and Order Codes of Air Circuit Breakers
Dimensions of Air Circuit Breakers
2/1
2
3
5
6
-2006
AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
F141E
F142E
F143E
F131E
F132E
F133E
F121E
F122E
F123E
F151E
F152E
F153E
Air Circuit Breakers Air Circuit Breakers
2 2
2/2
-2006
Protection of intelligent tripping gear :
1-RESET button: Push reset button after fault trip, the breaker restore close state.
2-CURRENT-TIME indicator display current or time
3-LED (light-emitting diode) can display breakers various status and classifications.
4-SELECT key; display the maximum phase current or maximum line voltage under normal
status, push the key then display each phase current or each line voltage in turn.
5-CLEAN key; push the key after setting the release or test fault or before closing the
breaker in order that the breakers in normal work status.
6- SET key; Check or set each protection characteristic current or time. Push the key then
display each status in turn.
7-FAULT-CHECK key; display or indicate the last fault status and fault current or time when
push the key.
8-TRIP and NON-TRIP key; for test function time.
9-STORAGE, + and key; for setting current or time.
Indicated parts are standards, Indicated parts are manufactured according to customers special orders.
* Opening time can adjust as 1s, 3s, 5s, 7s, 9s, 10s.
1
2
3
4
5
6 7
8
9
F121E F122E F123E F131E F132E F133E F141E F142E F143E
2500, 3200
3,4
415
750 V
8
3
(0,4-1)In
80
65
65
A, B
Electronic
Fixed / Drawer
IL=(0,4-1)In
Is=(0,4-15)In
I=In-50 kA
IG=(0,2-0,8)In
10000
3000
4000
3,4
415
750 V
8
3
(0,4-1)In
80
65
65
A, B
Electronic
Fixed / Drawer
IL=(0,4-1)In
Is=(0,4-15)In
I=In-50 kA
IG=(0,2-0,8)In
8000
3000
Type
Rated current - In
Number of pole
Rated operational voltage - Ue (a.c.) 50-60 Hz
Rated insulation voltage - Ui (a.c.) 50-60 Hz
Testing voltage (1 min) (a.c.) 50-60 Hz
Rated current adjust field
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity - Icu 415V~
Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity - Ics 415V~
Rated short time withstand current - Icw 1s 415 V~
Category (EN 60947-2 / IEC 60947-2)
Tripping release type
Mounting method
Long time delay
Short time delay
Instantaneous
Earth fault
Mechanical life Operation With maintenance
Without maintenance
Accessories
Undervoltage release *
Shunt trip
Closing coil
Auxiliary contact
Motor control mechanism
Inverser lock
A
V
V
kV
kV
In
(kA rms)
(kA rms)
(kA rms)
70
35
35
100
65
65
70
35
35
100
80
80
70
35
35
100
80
80
Technical characteristics of
air circuit breakers
IEC 60947-2
EN 60947-2
CE
F151E F152E F153E
5000
3,4
415
1000 V
8
3
(0,4-1)In
80
65
65
A, B
Electronic
Drawer
IL=(0,4-1)In
Is=(0,4-15)In
I=In-50 kA
IG=(0,2-0,8)In
10000
2500
70
35
35
120
100
100
630,800,1000
1250,1600,2000
3,4
415
750 V
8
3
(0,4-1)In
80
50
50
A, B
Electronic
Fixed / Drawer
IL=(0,4-1)In
Is=(0,4-15)In
I=In-50 kA
IG=(0,2-0,8)In
10000
3000
GENERAL TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS GENERAL TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2 2
2/3
-2006
Protection functions: Various functions such as over-load
long inverse time lag, short inverse time lag, short time
del ay f i xed t i me-l ag and spl i t -second response are
avai l abl e for users to confi gurate di fferent protecti on
characteristics.
Single-phase earthing protection characteristics.
Display function: Current setting Ir display and action
current display.
Ampere-meter function: To monitor main circuit current
Alarm function: Overload alarm
Self-checking: Over-heating protection and microcom-
puter self-diagnosis
Test function: To test the action properties of trippinggear
Note: The breaker can be equipped with a communicatior
interface to perform remote control, remote adjustment and
remote monitoring through a computer within the distance
of 1km on useiJs requirement.
Intelligent Controller Characteristics :
Protection characteristics of over-current tripping gear :
The setting value and the error of the tripping gear are shown in the below mentioned table.
Fig-1: The protection characteristics of the over-current tripping gear is shown in fig-1.
Fig-2: The earthing fault protection characteristics is of specified-time. Its protection property is shown in fig-2.
Time Action Funtion
The inverse time action characteristics of the long delay over-current protection is shown in the below table.
Long delay
Short delay Instantaneous Earthing fault
I
L
(0.4~1)ln
I
S
(0,4-15) IL
I
1.0ln~50kA
I
G
(0.2-0.8) In
Accuracy
15%
Accuracy
10%
Accuracy
10%
Accuracy
10%
10000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
0,5
0,2
0,1
0,05
0,02
0,01
0,005
0,002
0,001
t(s)
0,050,060,080,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,81 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30
xIn
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
I
G
=(0,2-0,8)In
>2h inaction <1h action
1.5 IL time setting (s) 15 30 60 120 240 480
2.0 IL action time (s) 8.4 16.9 33.7 67.5 135 270
1,05 IL 1,3 IL
Fig-1 Over-Current Protection Diagram Fig-2 Single Phase Earthing Fault Protection Diagram :
Drawer Type Circuit Breaker
During the push - pull of drawer, circuit breakers can trip automatically. In the event that drawer type circuit breaker
breakdown it can change with its backup in a short time.
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
0,50,60,8 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 300
xIn
t(s)
10000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
0,5
0,2
0,1
0,05
0,02
0,01
0,005
0,002
0,001
I
L
=(0,4~1)In
t
L
=(15~480)s
I
s
=(0,4~15)In
I
=In~50kA
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2/4
-2006
The acti on characteri sti cs of the short del ay over-
current protection.
The protection characteristics of the tripping gear is of
inverse time at low-multiple current. Its I
2
T = (8IL
2
) ts,
where i s a common desi gn del ayed t i me. I t can be
automatically converted into specified time when the
overload current is greater than 8 l
L
. The specified-time
property is shown in table.
Setting delay time (s)
0.1 0.2
Returnable time (s)
0.06 0.14 0.3 0.4 0.23 0.35
Self-diagnosis function
The tripping gear has a function to diagnose the local
troubl e. If any troubl e happens to the computer, the
tripping gear will send an error display "E" or an alarm
signal and at the same time to restart the computer. The
breaker can also be switch off, if it is required by user.
An alarm signal will be sent, if local ambient temperature
reaches 80C or the temperature inside housing exceeds
80C due to heat generated by the contact. The breaker
can al so be swi t ched of at l ow current condi t i on, i f
required by user.
Ampere-meter function
The ampere meter can display main circuit current on its
liquid crystal displays (LCD). Press the selection key, the
meter wi l l di spl ay i ndi cati ng l amp posi ti oned phase
cur rent or t he maxi mum phase cur rent . Press t he
selection key once more, the meter will display another
phase current.
Test function
Press set key to set the setting current to the value at the
status of l ong del ay, short del ay, momentary status,
indicating lamp on, + and - respectively. Then the tripping
gear test can be carried out by pressing test key. There
are two kinds of test key: one is of non-trip test key, the
other is of trip test key. Please refer to the paragraph
tripping gear test in the section of erection, operation and
maintenance in detail. The non-trip test can be carried out
with the breaker operating in the network. When over-
cur r ent happens i n t he net wor k, t he t est can be
automatically stopped immediately to fulfill real over-
current protection.
Set up function
The current and the delayed time can be arbitrarily set up
by pressi ng functi on key of l ong del ay, short del ay,
momentary status, earthing, + and - according to user's
requirement. Press function key storage when the current
and the delayed time reach the required value, then the
required setting up is fulfilled. For detail, please refer to
the paragraph setting up of tripping gear in the section
erection, operation and maintenance. When over-current
troubl e happens, thi s functi on can be automati cal l y
stopped.
Load monitoring characteristics
Two setting values should be set: Ic
1
setting range (0.2-
1)ln and Ic2 setting range (0.2-1) ln. The characteristic of
Ic1 time delay is of inverse time lag with its time delay
setting to be half of the long time delay setting. There are
two kinds of property of Ic
2
time delay: the first kind is of
inverse time lag with its time delay setting to be quarter of
the long time delay setting; the second kind is of fixed
timing limit with its time delay setting to be 60 seconds.
The former kind is used to stop the most unimportant sub-
level load when the current reaches the over-current
setting. The later kind is used to stop the unimportant
sub-level load when the current exceeds Ic
1
so as to keep
power supply for main circuit and important load. When
the current is reduced to Ic
2
, an instruction will be sent
after a period of time delay to switch on the stopped
unimportant sub-level circuit and to restore power supply
of the whole system. Please refer to figure 3 and figure 4
for load monitor function.
10000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
6
2
1
0,6
0,2
0,1
0,05 0,060,060,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30
t(s)
xIn
fig-3
I
L
=(0,4-1) In
Ic
1
=(0,2-1) In
Ic
2
=(0,2-1) In
t
L
=15-480s
tlc
1
=t
L
/2
tlc
2
=t
L
/4
10000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
6
2
1
0,6
0,2
0,1
0,05 0,060,060,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30
t(s)
xIn
fig-4
I
L
=(0,4-1) In
Ic
1
=(0,2-1) In
Ic
2
=(0,2-1) In
t
L
=15-480s
tlc
2
=60s
tlc
1
=t
L
/2
Order Codes :
Operating
Current (A)
630
800
1000
1250
1600
2000
2500
3200
4000
Fixed Type
9AL-ESS43-0630
9AL-ESS43-0800
9AL-ESS43-1000
9AL-ESS43-1250
9AL-ESS43-1600
9AL-ESS43-2000
9AM-ESS43-2500
9AM-ESS43-3200
9AN-ESS43-4000
F121E
F131E
F141E
Type Drawer Type
9AL-ESC43-0630
9AL-ESC43-0800
9AL-ESC43-1000
9AL-ESC43-1250
9AL-ESC43-1600
9AL-ESC43-2000
9AM-ESC43-2500
9AM-ESC43-3200
9AN-ESC43-4000
9AM-ESE43-2500
9AM-ESE43-3200
9AN-ESE43-4000
Manual Charging Version
630
800
1000
1250
1600
2000
9AL-EMS43-0630
9AL-EMS43-0800
9AL-EMS43-1000
9AL-EMS43-1250
9AL-EMS43-1600
9AL-EMS43-2000
F122E
9AL-EMC43-0630
9AL-EMC43-0800
9AL-EMC43-1000
9AL-EMC43-1250
9AL-EMC43-1600
9AL-EMC43-2000
9AL-EME43-0630
9AL-EME43-0800
9AL-EME43-1000
9AL-EME43-1250
9AL-EME43-1600
9AL-EME43-2000
630
800
1000
1250
1600
2000
9AL-EHS43-0630
9AL-EHS43-0800
9AL-EHS43-1000
9AL-EHS43-1250
9AL-EHS43-1600
9AL-EHS43-2000
F123E
9AL-EHC43-0630
9AL-EHC43-0800
9AL-EHC43-1000
9AL-EHC43-1250
9AL-EHC43-1600
9AL-EHC43-2000
9AL-EHE43-0630
9AL-EHE43-0800
9AL-EHE43-1000
9AL-EHE43-1250
9AL-EHE43-1600
9AL-EHE43-2000
2000
2500
3200
9AM-EMS43-2000
9AM-EMS43-2500
9AM-EMS43-3200
F132E
9AM-EMC43-2000
9AM-EMC43-2500
9AM-EMC43-3200
9AM-EME43-2000
9AM-EME43-2500
9AM-EME43-3200
2000
2500
3200
9AM-EHS43-2000
9AM-EHS43-2500
9AM-EHS43-3200
F133E
9AM-EHC43-2000
9AM-EHC43-2500
9AM-EHC43-3200
9AM-EHE43-2000
9AM-EHE43-2500
9AM-EHE43-3200
4000 9AN-EMS43-4000 F142E 9AN-EMC43-4000 9AN-EME43-4000
4000 9AN-EHS43-4000 F143E 9AN-EHC43-4000 9AN-EHE43-4000
9AL-ESF43-0630
9AL-ESF43-0800
9AL-ESF43-1000
9AL-ESF43-1250
9AL-ESF43-1600
9AL-ESF43-2000
9AM-ESF43-2500
9AM-ESF43-3200
9AN-ESF43-4000
9AL-ESE43-0630
9AL-ESE43-0800
9AL-ESE43-1000
9AL-ESE43-1250
9AL-ESE43-1600
9AL-ESE43-2000
Motor Charging Version
9AL-EMF43-0630
9AL-EMF43-0800
9AL-EMF43-1000
9AL-EMF43-1250
9AL-EMF43-1600
9AL-EMF43-2000
9AL-EHF43-0630
9AL-EHF43-0800
9AL-EHF43-1000
9AL-EHF43-1250
9AL-EHF43-1600
9AL-EHF43-2000
9AM-EMF43-2000
9AM-EMF43-2500
9AM-EMF43-3200
9AM-EHF43-2000
9AM-EHF43-2500
9AM-EHF43-3200
9AN-EMF43-4000
9AN-EHF43-4000
F151E
F152E
F153E
5000
5000
5000
9AN-EHC43-5000
9AN-EHC43-5000
9AN-EHC43-5000
9AN-EHE43-5000
9AN-EHE43-5000
9AN-EHE43-5000
-
-
-
-
-
-
Drawer Type Fixed Type
2/5 -2006
M: Energy storage motor
F: Shunt tripping gear
SB1: Shunt button
SB2: Under-voltage button
SB3: Close button
Q : Under-voltage tripping gear or
Under-voltage time delay tripping gear
Main circuit Over-current trip Emergency break Electric break Electric close Auxiliary switch
+ -
Tripping Power Supply
Power Supply
Trouble Close
SB2
SB1
J2
SB3
Energy Storage Switch Off
Handing
unit
Electronic trip
Q F X
M
SA
3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 36 38 39 41 42 44 45 47
1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 37 40 43 46
Fig-5
X : Close magnet
SA : Limit switch of motor
CONNECTION DIAGRAM AND ORDER CODES of AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS CONNECTION DIAGRAM AND ORDER CODES of AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2 2
2/6
-2006
In A
630
800-1600
2000
d mm
10
15
20
413 (4 poles)
318 (3 poles)
13
340 (3 poles)
435 (4 poles)
150 69.5
290
5
5
1
1
2
3
3
5
4
0
2
d
F121E-F122E-F123E (Fixed Type) :
448 (4 poles)
353 (3 poles)
4
3
9
292
375 (3 poles)
470 (4 poles)
45 421
97 175 139
9
2
1
1
2
d
In A
630
800-1600
2000
d mm
10
15
20
175 33
14
11
2
6
5
3
6
0
F121E-F122E-F123E (Drawer Type) :
2
1
.
5
302
172
344 15.5
5
2
6
8
20
3
7
8 3
0
2
1
5
5
DIMENSIONS of AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS DIMENSIONS of AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
DIMENSIONS of AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2/7
-2006
In A
2000-2500
3200
d mm
20
30
13
493 (4 poles)
378 (3 poles)
400 (3 poles)
515 (4 poles)
150
290
69.5
1
1
2
5
5
3
3
5
4
0
2
d
In A
2000-2500
3200
d mm
20
30
528 (4 poles)
413 (3 poles)
352
435 (3 poles)
500 (4 poles)
4
3
9
45
97 175 139
421
1
1
2
9
2
d
33 175
14
11
4
4
0
3
2
5
2
1
.
5
2
6
8
20
5
362
202
404
1
5
5
3
0
2
3
7
8
15.5
404
2
6
9
2
8
.
5
2
3
1
1
362
8- 5
2 2
528 (4 poles)
413 (3 poles)
352
435 (3 poles)
550 (4 poles)
4
3
9
4
4
0
11
2 11x17
33 175
14
2
1
.
5
2
6
8
20
5
362
202
404
1
5
5
3
0
2
3
7
8
15.5 45
97 175 139
421
1
1
2
9
2
2/8
-2006
2
1
.
5
2
6
8
20
5
362
202
404
1
5
5
3
0
2
3
7
8
15.5
528 (4 poles)
413 (3 poles)
352
435 (3 poles)
550 (4 poles)
4
3
9
4
4
0
11
2 11x17
33 175
14
2
1
.
5
2
6
8
20
5
362
202
404
1
5
5
3
0
2
3
7
8
15.5 45
97 175 139
421
1
1
2
9
2
928 (4 poles)
813 (3 poles)
835 (4 poles)
352 (3 poles)
1
4
494
97 175 139
3
0
1
1
2
9
2
7
0
3
2-11X17
33 175
4
4
9
3 3
LOAD BREAK SWITCHES
& SWITCH FUSES
General Information About Load Break Switches & Switch Fuses
Technical Characteristic and Pictures of Switch Fuses
Technical Characteristic and Pictures of Load Break Switches
Dimensions and Installation Diagram
3/1
LOAD BREAK SWITCHES
& SWITCH FUSES
2
4
5
6
-2006
FSF 160 FSF 250
FSF 400
FSF 630
FLS 160 FLS 250
FLS 400
FLS 630
Switch Fuses
Load Break Switches
Switch Fuses
Load Break Switches
CONTENTS CONTENTS
Load break switches & switch fuses consist of contact
system with constant contact which placed moulded case.
Breaking energy is divided between contacts with this
system. Combustion in contact is kept minimum due to
energy is dividing between contacts and arc extinguisher
elements in the breaking chamber. Getting small combustion
extends the life of contacts.
160A switches are manufactured with friction and high value
switches are manufactured with using rolling contact. Friction
and rolling contact systems provide clear and precise
touching at every opening and closing of switch. Passing
resistance and loss of energy among the contacts are limited
to minimum with respect as a special spring. Current is
broken from same phase and at four different points in the
switch (except 160 A). This feature builds up current breaking
capacity of switch and fuses separated from the circuit at
two points. (Pic-1)
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT LOAD BREAK SWITCHES & SWITCH FUSES GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT LOAD BREAK SWITCHES & SWITCH FUSES
General characteristics :
The Federal Load Break Switches & Switch Fuses have
been designed to provide a compact, instantly opening-
closed with rolling or friction contact. They have a breaking
feature from same phase and four different points and are
high performance devices. Load break switches are
manufactured with or without fuses according to the IEC-
EN 60947-3 and VDE-0660 standards, CE certificate and
AC 23 class. Due to this feature they are used at AC and
DC systems and motor circuit.
Various combinations and types with high amperes which
are not shown in this catalogue are manufactured accordig
to special orders.
3/2
High breaking capacity,
High electrical and mechanical endurance,
Rolling contact system (except for 160 A) capable of self-
cleaning,
Double breaking on each phase,
Modern technology and compact design,
Quick making and breaking operation independent of
manuel operation,
Small dimension,
Case made of thermoset material, non absorbing and
flame-heat resistant,
Capable of mounting to front or rear side of panel cover.
General features :
Safety :
Contacts :
- Off 0 position both fuse terminals will not be alive so the
fuses can be changed, safely.
- On I position the handle will be locked mechanically, so
t he panel cannot be opened whi l e energi zed.
- Off 0 position the handle can be blocked out with a
padlock so that it may prevent any unauthorized personnel
to energize the panel.
- The isolation distance between the phases is rather wide
to prevent arc jumping.
- Additional fuse protection shields are used for better
isolation and protection in the switch fuses.
- Arc separators are used for arc extinguishing between
contacts which occur during closing or breaking process.
Opening-closing mechanism and control handle :
Opening-closing mechanism has been provided to operate
the poles altogether and very rapidly. Speed of opening
and closing is independent from hand moving. Control
handle is passing type. The handle extention is necessary
for all cases supplied in the length, than it is cut by the
customer at the desired length. The position of switch can
be seen by means of indicating plate and control handle.
Switching angle for ON/OFF operation is 90 degrees.
Locking with
padlock 0
position
Pic-2
-2006
Pic-1
Rolling contact system (250A, 400A, 630A)
Frame and cover are molded from glass-polyester material,
BMC (Bulk Moulding Compound) in literature that combines
ruggedness and high dieletric stength, as well as high
mechanical resistance in a compact design. Connection
bars are plated with silver. Capable of mounting to front or
rearside of panel cover.
3 3
Pic-3
3,4
3,4
Order Codes :
Number of poles
FSF 160
FSF 250
FSF 400
FSF 630
FLS 160
FLS 250
FLS 400
FLS 630
Type
9BB-S110-0160
9BC-S110-0250
9BC-S110-0400
9BD-S110-0630
9BB-L110-0160
9BC-L110-0250
9BC-L110-0400
9BD-L110-0630
Order codes
Note : pole number is written (like 3 or 4) * Switch fuses can dispatch without NH fuse.
FSF160 A
FSF250-FSF400 A
FLS160 A
FLS250-FLS400 A
Type
Terminal Cover Order Codes :
8BA-G0000-0000
8BB-G0000-0000
8BA-H0000-0000
8BB-H0000-0000
FLS160 A
FLS250-FLS400 A
Type
Upper Terminal Protection Cover Order Codes :
8BA-D0000-0000
8BB-D0000-0000
3/3
Inside construction :
Current is broken from the four separate points in a rolling
contact system. This way the breaking capacity is increased
and when the circuit breaker is in open position, fuses are
seperated from the circuit completely.
- Opening closing position are not depending on hand
actuated.
- High speed opening-closing can be done thanks to the
springs in mechanism.
Frictional system is applied at type of 160 A. In this way this
system provides clear and precise touching at every opening
and closed. Especially contact destruction is prevented by
rolling contact system. Arc extinguishers are used for arc
extinguishing between contacts which occur during making
or breaking process.
By means of a special sling rolling contact system, moving
contacts are mechanically connected to the operating handle
to ensure a positive ON/OFF action and a forced operation
of contacts. Any damage to contact is prevented in the
rolling contact.
Following accessories are available,
-Cage type connection terminals
- Terminal protective covers (Pic-4)
- Neutral link available
- Auxiliary conctact block 1NO + 1 NC for remote
indication of switch status.
- Special interlock and padlock system.
Accessories :
Frame and cover :
-2006
Pic-4
Terminal covers
Switch fuse with
terminal cover
Note: Terminal cover prevent to contact of switch fuse
cable connection terminal with hand. This feature provides
safe the insulation according to CE certificate.
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE LOAD BREAK SWITCHES & SWITCH FUSES GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE LOAD BREAK SWITCHES & SWITCH FUSES
3/4
-2006
Switch Fuses
Dimensions
Tip
FSF 160
FSF 250
FSF 400
FSF 630
185
255.5
317
A
37
43.5
50
E
142
163
243
B
123
138.5
202
C
105
127
164
D
43.5
65
89
F
15
15.5
16.5
G
32
33
54
H
28
32
37
J
3
4
6
K
20
25
30
40
L
8
11
13
13
15
83.5
M
160
220
220
N
12
20.5
14
P
152
197
222.5
R
10-70
S
FSF 160
FSF 250
FSF 400 FSF 630
A
V
Hz
kVAr
kW
A
A
NH
kA
Operation
Operation
kg.
mm
2
kW
kW
FSF 160 FSF 250 FSF 400 FSF 630 Type
3 , 4
160
1000
8
40-60
75
100
120
76
1280
1600
65
00
10000
1000
2.7
70
3 , 4
250
1000
8
40-60
132
160
220
140
2000
2500
65
1
10000
1000
4.7
120
3 , 4
400
1000
8
40-60
200
280
360
220
3200
4000
65
2
10000
1000
4.8
240
3 , 4
630
1000
8
40-60
320
340
400
300
5040
6300
65
3
8000
1000
8.7
2x185
Number of pole
Rated thermal current (lth)
Rated insulation voltage
Rated frequency
Reactive power
Rated operating power
AC23
Rated breaking capacity
Rated closed capacity
Fuse type
Rated fuses short circuit breaking capacity
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Weight
Min.connection conductor cross-section
380V
AC 23
AC 23
(Ui)
380V
500V
690V
kV
4. Pole
Rear Connection
(Mounting foot for FSF 630)
SWITCH FUSES SWITCH FUSES
3 3
3/5
-2006
Tip
FLS 160
FLS 250
FLS 400
FLS 630
185
255.5
317
A
37
43.5
50
E
142
163
243
B
123
138.5
202
C
105
127
164
D
43.5
65
89
F
15
15.5
16.5
G
32
33
54
H
28
32
37
J
3
4
6
K
20
25
30
40
L
8
11
13
13
15
83.5
M
160
220
220
N
12
20.5
14
P
152
197
222.5
R
10-70
S
Load Break Switches
Dimensions
FLS 160
FLS 250
FLS 400 FLS 630
FLS 160 FLS 250 FLS 400 FLS 630 Type
3,4
160
1000
8
40-60
75
100
120
76
1280
1600
65
20
8
10000
1000
2.6
70
3,4
250
1000
8
40-60
132
160
220
140
2000
2500
65
35
15
10000
1000
4.4
120
3,4
400
1000
8
40-60
200
280
360
220
3200
4000
65
35
15
10000
1000
4.5
240
3,4
630
1000
8
40-60
320
340
400
300
5040
6300
65
60
25
8000
1000
8.5
2x185
Number of pole
Rated thermal current (lth)
Rated frequency
Reactive power
Rated operating power
AC23
Mechanical life
Short-circuit making capacity
Electrical life
Weight
Min.connection conductor cross-section
Short-time withstand current
380V
500V
690V
380V
AC 23
AC 23
(Ui)
Ad.
A
kV
Hz
kVAr
kW
A
A
kApeak
kg.
mm
2
kA/1s
kW
kW
V
Rated fuses short circuit breaking capacity kA
4. Pole
Rear Connection
(Mounting foot for FLS 630)
Operation
Operation
LOAD BREAK SWITCHES LOAD BREAK SWITCHES
DIMENSIONS AND INSTALLATION DIAGRAM DIMENSIONS AND INSTALLATION DIAGRAM
3/6
-2006
Upper terminal protection cover : Right and left terminal protective cover :
Control handle Shaft extension Door drilling template
for FSF type
for FLS type
for FLS and FSF type
CONTENTS
VERTICAL TYPE SWITCH FUSES
-2006
General Information About Vertical Type Switch Fuses
Technical Characteristics of Vertical Type Switch Fuses
Dimensions of Vertical Type Switch Fuses
2
3
4
4/1
VERTICAL TYPE SWITCH FUSES
FVS160 FVS630 FVS250 FVS400
CONTENTS
4 4
Vertical Type Switch Fuse are manufactured according to the
IEC 60947-3,CE Certificate and AC23 class.FVS Vertical Type
Switch Fuses are used for electrical distribution,protection of
short-circuit and overload current.
Features:
-Each phase opens and breaks independent of other phases
-Design of mounting to horizontal bar as vertical.
-High short-circuit braking capacity
-Easy mounting
-High electrical and mechanical endurance
-Modern technology and compact design
-Low power loss
-Mel ti ng of fuse wi re can be seen from outsi de.
-In normal circuit conditions, it is suitable to making, carrying
and breaking of load current. It is also be closed on the short-
circuit .
-On the open position, determinated conditions for switches
are carried out both terminal of each phase.
-Isolative parts isolates from parts with voltage in the level of
nominal isolation.
-Fuse holder is made of high quality material which is durable
to abnormal heat and voltage. Parts with voltage isolates
in the level of nominal isolation.
-Fuse handle mounts and separates to base. It is not needed
extra apart for this operate.
-Fuse handle
-Under the energize of the system, it is suitable to mount by
a authorized personnel with using of equipment on front side
of the panel.
-All parts of vertical switch fuse capable of self-
extinguishing,halojen-free and doesnt included heavy metals.
-Cover is made of high quality material which is durable to
abnormal heat and voltage. Parts with voltage isolates in
the level of nominal isolation.
-Contact is made of E-Cu 57 electrolytic copper and cover
with 3mm silver.
-2006
4/2
General:
FVS160
Frame Case
Handle
Terminal
Cover
FVS250/FVS400/FVS630
Frame
Handle
Terminal
Cover
Case
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT VERTICAL TYPE SWITCH FUSES GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT VERTICAL TYPE SWITCH FUSES
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF VERTICAL TYPE SWITCH FUSES
-2006
4/3
Switch Fuses :
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)
Ad.
A
V
Hz
FVS160 FVS250 FVS400 FVS630 TYPE
3
160
1000
8
40-60
76
1280
1600
50
00
1600
200
2.6
70
185
20
M8
2000
-25 C
+55 C
+35 C not exceed
%50 at +40 C
%90 at +20 C
Operating continuously
IV
3
IP20
9BE-D1203-0160
3
250
1000
12
40-60
140
2000
2500
50
1
1600
200
6.8
120
185
32
M12
3
400
1000
12
40-60
220
3200
4000
50
2
1000
200
6.8
240
185
32
M12
3
630
1000
12
40-60
300
5040
6300
50
3
1000
200
7.2
2x185
185
56
M12
Number of Pole
Rated Thermal Current (Ith)
Rated Insulation Voltage
Rated frequency
kVAr
A
A
NH
kA
rms
Operation
Operation
kg.
mm
2
Reactive powers
Fuse type (it is dispacted without fuse)
Rated fuses short circuit braking capacity
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Weight
Connection conductor cross-section
380V
AC 22-B
AC 22-B
(Ui)
kV
Distance between main Bar Terminal mm
Maksimum-squeeze torque Nm
IEC 947-3
EN 60947-3
CE
Diameter of hole
Max.using high
Ambiant temperature
Min.
Max.
24 hours average
Relative humidity
Operating conditions
Excessive voltage class (according to IEC 60664)
Pollution degree
Protection class
Order code 9BE-D1203-0250 9BE-D1203-0400 9BE-D1203-0630
m
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF VERTICAL TYPE SWITCH FUSES
4 4
DIMENSIONS OF VERTICAL TYPE SWITCH FUSES
-2006
4/4
FVS160 Type :
FVS250/400/630 Type :
DIMENSIONS OF VERTICAL TYPE SWITCH FUSES
5 5
NH (H.R.C) FUSES
AND FUSE BASES
General Information About NH (H.R.C) Fuses
Super Flink NH Fuses Bases
Technical Characteristic Dimension and Order Codes of NH (HRC) Fuses
Technical Characteristic Dimension and Order Codes of NH (HRC) Fuse Bases
Maksimum Power Loses Table
5/1
NH (H.R.C) FUSES
AND FUSE BASES
2
3
4
5
6
-2006
NH2-FB
(80A...400A)
NH3-FB
(250A...630A)
NH00-FB
(6A...160A)
NH0-FB
(25A...160A)
NH1-FB
(50A...250A)
NHC00-FB
(6A...100A)
NH00-FA
NH0-FA
NH1-FA
NH2-FA
NH3-FA
STEATIT BMC
NH (H.R.C) Fuses
NH (H.R.C) Fuse Bases
NH (H.R.C) Fuses
NH (H.R.C) Fuse Bases
CONTENTS CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT NH (H.R.C) FUSES GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT NH (H.R.C) FUSES
5/2
General :
Fuses are protective device in which the melting or more fusible
elements open a circuit and interrupt the current if the current
exceeds a set value for a given length of time.
Federal NH (H.R.C.) fuses and fuse bases are produced in
according to VDE 636, IEC 60269/EN 60269, DIN 43620
standards and CE certificate.
According to the above mentioned standards the H.R.C. fuses
should have a higher breaking capacity than 50 kA. Federal
NH (H.R.C.) fuses have a breaking capacity of 120 kA. Federal
has a wide range of H.R.C. products. Rated voltages are 500
V. AC and 440 V DC. Rated current is up to 630 A. Our products
protect your panels, cables and installation reliability Figure-
3 gives the time-current characterstc of the fuses. The curves
show that fuses response time(+) which is connected with
load current. It is clear from the figure that at higher current
rates the response time is shorter.
Federal NH fuses have characteristic of delayed and it is strong
to Asynchrone motors openning current. It makes protection
against short circuit, boasting current and opens circuit
immediately. gL/Gg marks mean is line protection and this
class of fuses are used for protection of cabel and conductors.
From the time-current curve it is clear that fuses can operate
to 1.6 time higher of its rated value and breaking capacity of
circuit for a 5xIn value in 5 seconds. The melting wires (fusible
element) of the fuses cartridges are produced in different
shape and sizes for various current rated. Over the melting
wire small chambers are put together. In case of short-circuit
and over load different section with the same diameter melt
down and form partical sparks. As a result of the short-circuit
current is extinguished and the heat is evenly transferred along
the fuse.
The external body of the fuses should be resistant to the high
current temperature and pressure caused arcs during the
melting of the fuse wire. Therefore for this wire to melt, the
current energy should be higher than the wires maximum
resistance. During the process of the wire melting along and
inside the length of the fuse body, the current continues to flow
firstly as liquefied metal and secondly as steamed metal before
eventually losing its energy. This is visible in the form of an arc
(Fig-1) and therefore there is an immense increase of heat and
pressure during this action on the inside of the fuse body. The
fuse body must hold resistance to such actions otherwise will
be damaged and lose its purpose. To avoid such circumstance
the material used for the fuse body should be made accordingly
to the IEC 672 standards.
Federal fuses cartridge are produced to withstand shock
temperatures and dynamic stresses.
Federal fuses cartidge contacts are made from special brass
and silver plated. In time the silver plate becomes dark colored.
However,this is not important,because silver sulphur with current
heat becomes conductive.
Selective Protection (Selectivity)
Selectivity means that any fault occurs in a system is eliminated
by the close protection equipment so that the rest of the system
continuous ts normal operation.
Accordig to gL/gG operation class, NH fuses bases which have
%60 nominal circuit selectivly in high short circuit current. For
selectivity,fuses must be choosen according to table (Fig-2)
-2006
Fig-2
6
1
0
1
6
2
0
2
5
3
2
3
5
4
0
5
0
6
3
8
0
1
0
0
1
2
5
1
6
0
2
0
0
2
5
0
3
1
5
4
0
0
5
0
0
6
10
16
20
25
32
35
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
200
315
400
500
630
SELECTIVE PROTECTION (SELECTIVITY)
NOMINAL CURRENT 1th FUSE
N
O
M
I
N
A
L

C
U
R
R
E
N
T

O
F

2
t
h

F
U
S
E
1th FUSE
2
n
d

F
U
S
E
250
Selective Table
three phase, selective at 380 V.
three phase, selective at 500 V.
8CB-A0000-0000
8CB-A0000-0000
8CB-A0000-0000
1
2
3
227
227
227
116
116
116
Order
Codes
Size
Phase seperator dimensions(mm)
a b
Quartz Sand :
Fuse bases are produced in five size and steatit or BMC
cartridge according to request of customers. The bases
contacts are produced 00 and 0 size with clemence or
screw, other si zes have onl y screw connecti on
The bases contacts are made of electrolytic copper and
reinforced with steel segments in addition to ts own
compression and elasticity characteristic. Grabbing capacity
of conducts is higher than other bases. If bases are put
together side by side. Pertinaks seperaters which is given
as accessory is used for rising of phase isolation.
When fuses are placed in their bases, the fuses blade must
sit on base exactly. Otherwise incapable contact will cause
loss of resistance, temperature and power, failures.
Conductors must be mounted for bases and cross-sections
which is suitable to standars.
NH(HRC) Fuses Bases :
Inside of the body is Quartz Sand. This distinctiveness of
the sand is that it is high pure, clean and unhumid. Also
the sand is tightly contained in the fuse using a vibration
method to lock out any air and maintain the sufficiency of
sand. During melting of the wire, the sand helps cool down
the arc and insulates the distance between the broken fuse
wire points for quicker and more efficient energy decrease.
Fig - 1 Diagram of current and voltage changing when the damage current
is broken by the fuse.
Voltage
Current
Ip
Io
Ik(t)
ts tl
lo: passing current,
lk(t): short circuit current that will pass,
if a metallic bridge be inside of fuse.
lp: peak value of the short circuit current
ts: fusion time
t1: extinguishing time
5 5
NH Super flink fuses :
The super flink fuses are used to protected the power electronic
element, such as diode, thrystor in AC and DC against
overcurrent and short-circuit. Pure silver materials are used as
a melting lace wire. This is the most important difference
between NH (H.R.C) (fusable cut out) fuses, and LV NH
(H.R.C.) fuse flinks.
Increasing of temperature of super flink fuses is very high in
comparison with line protection device (in operating class gL,
Gg) as shown in time-current characteristics curve. (Fig-5) So
that precise protection is supplied at the value of rated current.
This means that these super flink fuses take into account all
aspects of electrical safety.
Operating characteristic: Super flink (Rapid)
Rated voltage : AC 500 V.
Operating class : gR
Breaking capacity : 100 kA (effective)
Dimensions of super flink fuses are same as NH fuses.
Rated current :
NH super flink fuses are manufactured in the following size
and with the following rated currents.
00, 1, 2 at 3 size and from 25 A. to 400 A.
Order codes :
5/3
-2006
Time - current characteristics of super flink NH (H.R.C) fuses "gR"
Load current Ampere
O
p
e
n
i
n
g

t
i
m
e
S
e
c
o
n
d
2
5
3
2
4
0
5
0
6
3
8
0
1
0
0
1
2
5
1
8
0
2
0
0
2
5
0
3
1
5
4
0
0
10000
4000
2000
1000
400
200
100
40
20
10
4
2
1
0.4
0.2
0.1
0.04
0.02
0.01
4
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
1
0
0
2
0
0
3
0
0
4
0
0
5
0
0
1
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
Breaking current diagram
10000
5000
1000
3000
500
300
100
50
30
10
5
3
1
1
7
0
0
5
0
0
3
0
0
1
0
0
0
7
0
5
0
3
0
1
0
0 7 5 3
1
0
M
a
x
.

v
a
l
u
e

o
f

c
u
r
r
e
n
t
k
A
p
e
a
k
Expected current kA
eff
22 Ip
630 A
400 A
250 A
160 A
100 A
Fig-5
Fig-4
Time - current characteristics of NH (H.R.C) fuses gL/gG
Loading current (effective value) Ampere
10000
5000
1000
3000
500
300
100
50
30
10
5
3
1
0,5
0,3
0,1
1
0
61
0
1
6
2
0
2
5
3
2
4
0
5
0
6
3
8
0
1
0
0
1
2
5
1
6
0
2
0
0
2
5
0
3
1
5
4
0
0
5
0
0
6
3
0
7
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
5
0
0
3
0
0
1
0
0
0
7
0
5
0
3
0
1
0
0
O
p
e
n
i
n
g

t
i
m
e
S
e
c
o
n
d
Fig-3
Order Code
9CB-BH000-0025
9CB-BH000-0032
9CB-BH000-0040
9CB-BH000-0050
9CB-BH000-0063
9CB-BH000-0080
9CB-BH000-0100
9CB-BH000-0125
9CD-BH000-0100
9CD-BH000-0125
Size Rated current
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
1
1
25 A
32 A
40 A
50 A
63 A
80 A
100 A
125 A
100 A
125 A
9CD-BH000-0160
9CD-BH000-0200
9CD-BH000-0250
9CE-BH000-0200
9CE-BH000-0250
9CE-BH000-0280
9CE-BH000-0315
9CE-BH000-0355
9CE-BH000-0400
9CE-BH000-0630
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
160 A
200 A
250 A
200 A
250 A
280 A
315 A
355 A
400 A
630 A
Type
NHG00-FB
NHG00-FB
NHG00-FB
NHG00-FB
NHG00-FB
NHG00-FB
NHG00-FB
NHG00-FB
NHG1-FB
NHG1-FB
NHG1-FB
NHG1-FB
NHG1-FB
NHG2-FB
NHG2-FB
NHG2-FB
NHG2-FB
NHG2-FB
NHG2-FB
NHG3-FB
Order Code Rated current Size Type
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT NH (H.R.C) FUSES GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT NH (H.R.C) FUSES
NH SUPER FLINK FUSES NH SUPER FLINK FUSES
-2006
5/4
Order
code
Size Rated
current
(A)
Quantity/
box
Kg./
box
1.225
1.225
1.225
1.225
1.225
1.225
1.225
1.225
1.225
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
1.760
1.760
1.760
1.760
1.760
1.760
1.760
1.760
1.760
1.760
1.760
1.760
1.760
1.760
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.300
1.300
1.300
1.300
1.300
1.300
1.300
1.300
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
2.005
2.005
2.005
2.005
2.005
2.005
2.005
2.005
0.980
0.980
0.980
0.980
0.980
C00
C00
C00
C00
C00
C00
C00
C00
C00
C00
C00
1.305
1.305
1.305
1.305
1.305
1.305
1.305
1.305
1.305
1.305
1.305
Compact
Note : * The signed currents are manufactured on request.
6
10
16
20
25
32
35
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
50
63
80
100
125
160
200
250
80
100
125
160
200
250
315
400
250
315
400
500
630
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
150 73.5 62 68 32 75 69 70
150 73.5 62 68 25 60 57 58
135 71 62 68 20 54 45 51
125 71 62 66 15 48 29.5 44.5
78.5 54 45 44.5
49 15 48 29.5
a1 a2
a3
a4 b e1 e2 e3
78.5 54 45 45
49 15 36 21
DIMENSIONS (mm)
NHC00-FB
NH00-FB
NH0-FB
NH1-FB
NH2-FB
NH3-FB
6
e2
e
1
e
3
1
0 10
10
e
1
1
0
e2
e
3
6
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
9CB-BG000-0006
9CB-BG000-0010
9CB-BG000-0016
9CB-BG000-0020
9CB-BG000-0025
9CB-BG000-0032
9CB-BG000-0035*
9CB-BG000-0040
9CB-BG000-0050
9CB-BG000-0063
9CB-BG000-0080
9CB-BG000-0100
9CB-BG000-0125
9CB-BG000-0160
9CC-BG000-0025
9CC-BG000-0032
9CC-BG000-0040
9CC-BG000-0050
9CC-BG000-0063
9CC-BG000-0080
9CC-BG000-0100
9CC-BG000-0125
9CC-BG000-0160
9CD-BG000-0050*
9CD-BG000-0063*
9CD-BG000-0080
9CD-BG000-0100
9CD-BG000-0125
9CD-BG000-0160
9CD-BG000-0200
9CD-BG000-0250
9CE-BG000-0080*
9CE-BG000-0100*
9CE-BG000-0125*
9CE-BG000-0160
9CE-BG000-0200
9CE-BG000-0250
9CE-BG000-0315
9CE-BG000-0400
9CF-BG000-0500
9CF-BG000-0630
9CF-BG000-0315
9CF-BG000-0400
9CF-BG000-0250*
9CA-BG000-0006
9CA-BG000-0010
9CA-BG000-0016
9CA-BG000-0020
9CA-BG000-0025
9CA-BG000-0032
9CA-BG000-0040
9CA-BG000-0050
9CA-BG000-0063
9CA-BG000-0080
9CA-BG000-0100
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS, DIMENSIONS and ORDER CODES of NH (H.R.C) FUSES TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS, DIMENSIONS and ORDER CODES of NH (H.R.C) FUSES
5 5
-2006
5/5
NH00-FA
NH0-FA
BMC
Steatit
BMC
BMC
BMC
Steatit
NH1-FA
Steatit
NH2-FA
NH3-FA
BMC
Steatit
Order code :
9CB-C0 00-0000 (BMC)
9CB-A0 00-0000 (Steatit)
C - with screw
K - with clemens
X - with screw
Size : 00
Rated current : 160 A
Quantity/box : 5
Kg./box : 0.795 (BMC)
1.060 (Steatit)
Dimensions (mm) :
a: 120 e: 23.5
b: 32.5 f : M8
c: 54 g: 25
d: 101 h: 7.5
Order code :
9CD-C0C00-0000 (BMC)
9CD-A0C00-0000 (Steatit)
Size : 1
Quantity/box : 3
Kg./box : 1.375 (BMC)
1.845 (Steatit)
Dimensions (mm) :
a: 200 f : M10
b: 47.5 g: 25
c: 82 h: 10.5
d: 175 k: 30
e: 35
Order code :
9CE-C0C00-0000 (BMC)
9CE-A0C00-0000 (Steatit)
Size : 2
Quantity/box : 3
Kg./box : 1.740 (BMC)
1.950 (Steatit)
Dimensions (mm) :
a: 225 f : M10
b: 47.5 g: 25
c: 88 h: 10.5
d: 200 k: 30
e: 35
Order code :
9CF-C0C00-0000 (BMC)
9CF-A0C00-0000 (Steatit)
Size : 3
Quantity/box : 3
Kg./box : 2.280 (BMC)
2.750 (Steatit)
Dimensions (mm) :
a: 240 f : M12
b: 47.5 g: 25
c: 99 h: 10.5
d: 210 k: 30
e: 37
Order code :
9CC-C0 00-0000 (BMC)
C - with screw
K - with clemens
X - with screw
Size : 0
Quantity/box : 5
Kg./box : 1.020
Dimensions (mm) :
a: 170 e: 30.5
b: 32 f : M8
c: 64.5 g: 25
d: 150 h: 7.5
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS, DIMENSIONS and ORDER CODES of NH (H.R.C) FUSE BASES TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS, DIMENSIONS and ORDER CODES of NH (H.R.C) FUSE BASES
Power losses of NH Fuse which reaches the steady state
temperature, when the rated current passing through the
circuit. When the rated current passing through fuses, the
temperature of connecting terminal (i.e for NH (HRC) 00 size
and 160 A rated current) should not exceed 65 K.
The power losses of Federal Fuses are below the IEC standars.
This values are shown at the table on below table
comparatively.
5/6
-2006
For 00 and 0 size, fuse bases are produced in three models
for easy connection to cables.
With double side screw :
For multi wires or bars (Fig-6a).
With double side bridge terminal :
For single core wires (Fig-6b).
With one side screw and another side terminal :
For single core wires or bars (Fig-6c).
Fuse should be fixed properly to fuse base. Otherwise there
can be an increase in the contact resistance, heating of
contact, power losses and many other kind of faults.
NH 00-FA
NH 0-FA
Fig-6a Fig-6b Fig-6c
NH 00-FA
NH 0-FA
NH 00-FA
NH 0-FA
Power Losses :
Size Rated current (A)
TS EN 60269 IEC 60269 VDE 0636 Federal
Maximum power losses values
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
6
10
16
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
12 W
12 W
12 W
12 W
12 W
12 W
12 W
12 W
12 W
12 W
12 W
12 W
12 W
12 W
12 W
12 W
12 W
12 W
12 W
12 W
12 W
12 W
12 W
12 W
7.5 W
7.5 W
7.5 W
7.5 W
7.5 W
7.5 W
7.5 W
7.5 W
7.5 W
7.5 W
7.5 W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
16 W
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
200
250
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
23 W
2
2
2
2
2
2
125
160
200
250
315
400
34 W
34 W
34 W
34 W
34 W
34 W
34 W
34 W
34 W
34 W
34 W
34 W
34 W
34 W
34 W
34 W
34 W
34 W
3
3
3
3
3
250
315
400
500
630
48 W
48 W
48 W
48 W
48 W
48 W
48 W
48 W
48 W
48 W
48 W
48 W
48 W
48 W
48 W
1.7 W
2.0 W
2.2 W
2.7 W
3.5 W
4.2 W
4.5 W
5.8 W
6.6 W
8.5 W
10.0 W
12.0 W
3.4 W
4.0 W
5.0 W
5.7 W
7.2 W
7.5 W
8.5 W
10.0 W
14.0 W
5.3 W
6.0 W
7.2 W
7.5 W
9.0 W
10.0 W
13.0 W
17.5 W
23.0 W
10.0 W
12.0 W
17.5 W
20.3 W
25.0 W
30.0 W
22.0 W
25.0 W
31.0 W
35.0 W
42.0 W
BMC (Bulk Moulding Compound)
It is moulding material which is look like dough, reinforce with
rather tall fiber and it is a composite material which has
adjustment features through changing contribution material
according to demand features.
BMC is from termoset plastic family and it has the same
features with bakelite and melamine. Its process conditions
and products have superiority and it is durable for dynamic
power and thermal shock.
MAXIMUM POWER LOSSES TABLE MAXIMUM POWER LOSSES TABLE
6 6
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
-2006
General and Technical Information About Miniature Circuit Breakers
Technical Table and Time-Current Diagram of Miniature Circuit Breakers
General and Technical Information About Phase-Neutral Miniature Circuit Breakers
General and Technical Information About Disconnector
Dimensions of Phase-Neutral, Miniature Circuit Breaker, Disconnector
2
3
4
5
6
6/1
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Phase-Neutral
Disconnector
FMN
FMH 6 kA
FMH 10 kA
FMB 3 kA
Phase-Neutral
FMS
Disconnector
CONTENTS CONTENTS
-2006
Miniature Circuit Breakers protect electrical circuits against
overload and short-circuit current. They provide ON-OFF
switching easily.
3 - 6 and 10 kA Federal Miniature Circuit Breakers are
manufactured between the ranges 6 A - 63 A and 1, 2, 3, 4
poles. They comply with IEC 60898-1 standard and CE
certificate. There are B and C type MCBs. During the short-
circuit; circuit is opened without delay between 3 and 5 type
for B type and 5 and 10 type for C type. In the event of failure
on any phase, 2, 3, 4 poles circuit breakers obtains to not
being put into use of device.
B type : Recommended for household lighting and control
circuits, etc.
C type : Recommended for transformers, inductive loads like
florescent lamps.
When the tripping handle of breaker is raised, breaking
mechanism reopen the circuit as long as fault continues.
Federal Miniature Circuit Breakers open circuit in a very short
time when short-circuit occurs. Especially 6-10 kA MCBs have
special contact design which enable limiting of current in case
of short circuit. This, limits the effects of thermal and magnetic
forces, against demaging effects of high short-circuit current.
Federal Miniature Circuit Breakers are small, compact and
easily mounted on rail. Terminal connection is designed to
protect the personal against accidentally touching.
General :
6/2
Connection
diagram
Rated
current
In (A)
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
Breaking
capacity
Ics (kA)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Characteristic
B
9EA-B033 -0006
9EA-B033 -0010
9EA-B033 -0016
9EA-B033 -0020
9EA-B033 -0025
9EA-B033 -0032
9EA-B033 -0040
9EA-B033 -0050
9EA-B033 -0063
9EB-B063 -0006
9EB-B063 -0010
9EB-B063 -0016
9EB-B063 -0020
9EB-B063 -0025
9EB-B063 -0032
9EB-B063 -0040
9EB-B063 -0050
9EB-B063 -0063
9EB-B103 -0006
9EB-B103 -0010
9EB-B103 -0016
9EB-B103 -0020
9EB-B103 -0025
9EB-B103 -0032
9EB-B103 -0040
9EB-B103 -0050
9EB-B103 -0063
Characteristic
C
9EA-C033 -0006
9EA-C033 -0010
9EA-C033 -0016
9EA-C033 -0020
9EA-C033 -0025
9EA-C033 -0032
9EA-C033 -0040
9EA-C033 -0050
9EA-C033 -0063
9EB-C063 -0006
9EB-C063 -0010
9EB-C063 -0016
9EB-C063 -0020
9EB-C063 -0025
9EB-C063 -0032
9EB-C063 -0040
9EB-C063 -0050
9EB-C063 -0063
9EB-C103 -0006
9EB-C103 -0010
9EB-C103 -0016
9EB-C103 -0020
9EB-C103 -0025
9EB-C103 -0032
9EB-C103 -0040
9EB-C103 -0050
9EB-C103 -0063
Order code
1, 2, 3, 4
poles
Not : pole number is written. (1, 2, 3, 4)
Types
Pic-1
Protected terminal
connections
Heat resistant
thermoplastic body
Suitable bearing
fitting to rail
Suitable for using
in panels with
RAL 7035 Gray body
Wide ergonomic
handle
Full safety with
lock for ON-OFF
swiching
Connection screw
suitable to any
screwdriver
Protected connection
terminals suitable for
using MCB bars
Technical
information
FMB 3 kA
FMH 6 kA
FMH 10 kA
GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
6 6
-2006
6/3
I1 ( t 1h )
I2 ( t < 1h )
I3 ( t 0,1s )
I4 ( t < 0,1s)
1,13 x In
1,45 x In
3 x In
5 x In
1,13 x In
1,45 x In
5 x In
10 x In
B C
Type FMB
B, C
3
6,10,16,20,25,32,40,50,63
230/400
690
6
1,2,3,4
50 - 60
20
Characteristic
Breaking capacity
Rated current
Rated operational voltage - Ue
Rated insulation voltage - Ui
Number of pole
Frequency
Mechanical life
kA
A
V
V
kV
Hz
FMH
B, C
6
6,10,16,20,25,32,40,50,63
10
6,10,16,20,25,32,40,50,63
Time - Current diagram ( FMB In < 40 A )
60
40
20
10
6
4
2
1
20
10
6
4
2
1
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.1
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.01
1 2 3 4 6 8 10
x Rated current
S
e
c
o
n
d
M
i
n
u
t
e
Time
With B and C
characteristic and
IEC/EN 60898 30 C
ambient temperature
B C
I4 I4
I1 I2
I3 I3
Fig-1 Time - Current diagram ( FMB In=50 A, 63 A )
60
40
20
10
6
4
2
1
20
10
6
4
2
1
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.1
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.01
1 2 3 4 6 8 10
x Rated current
S
e
c
o
n
d
M
i
n
u
t
e
Time
B C
I4 I4
I1 I2
I3 I3
With B and C
characteristic and
IEC/EN 60898 30 C
ambient temperature
Fig-2
Time - Current diagram ( FMH )
60
40
20
10
6
4
2
1
20
10
6
4
2
1
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.1
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.01
1 2 3 4 6 8 10
x Rated current
S
e
c
o
n
d
M
i
n
u
t
e
Time
B C
I4 I4
I1 I2
I3 I3
With B and C
characteristic and
IEC/EN 60898 30 C
ambient temperature
Fig-3
TECHNICAL TABLE and TIME-CURRENT DIAGRAM OF MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS TECHNICAL TABLE and TIME-CURRENT DIAGRAM OF MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
-2006
6/4
General :
This breaker is acceptable to a line of AC 50Hz/60Hz, rated
voltage 230V and rated current 6 to 32 A, used to protect the
line from overload and short circuit. It can also be used for
infrequent line conversion under normal condition.
It is a phase wire + neutre wire type breaker by our company,
which can switch off phase wire and neutral wire simultaneously
and features small volume and high safe performance. For a
single- pole breaker , the phase wire and neutral wire are easy
to be mis-connected or the potential of neutral wire to ground
may be higher, thus it may result in dangerous fire and injuring
people. This household breaker eliminates such shortages. It
is acceptable to office buildings, dwellin houses, and so likes.
The product is manufactured according to IEC 60898-1
standards and CE certificate.
I1 ( t 1h )
I2 ( t < 1h )
I3 ( t 0,1s )
I4 ( t < 0,1s)
1,13 x In
1,45 x In
3 x In
5 x In
1,13 x In
1,45 x In
5 x In
10 x In
B C
Time - Current diagram (FMN)
60
40
20
10
6
4
2
1
20
10
6
4
2
1
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.1
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.01
1 2 3 4 6 8 10
x Rated current
S
e
c
o
n
d
M
i
n
u
t
e
Time
With B and C
characteristic and
IEC/EN 60898 30 C
ambient temperature
B C
I4 I4
I1 I2
I3 I3
N1
N2
Connection
scheme
Rated
current
In (A)
6A
10A
16A
20A
25A
32A
Breaking
capacity
Ics (kA)
4,5
4,5
4,5
4,5
4,5
4,5
Characteristic
B
9EC-BO431-0006
9EC-B0431-0010
9EC-B0431-0016
9EC-B0431-0020
9EC-B0431-0025
9EC-B0431-0032
Characteristic
C
9EC-C0431-0006
9EC-C0431-0010
9EC-C0431-0016
9EC-C0431-0020
9EC-C0431-0025
9EC-C0431-0032
Order Codes
FMN 4,5 kA
1 pole
(Phase-Neutral)
Frequency
(Hz)
Rated
operational
voltage-Ue (V)
Rated
insulation
voltage-Ui (V)
Rated impulse
withstand
voltage-Uimp (kV)
230 690 6 50 - 60
Pic-2
Fig-4
Characteristic
GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT PHASE-NEUTRAL MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT PHASE-NEUTRAL MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
6 6
-2006
6/5
General :
Federal Disconnector are manufactured according to IEC
60947-3-standarts, AC22 utilization category and CE norms
between the ranges of 40A- 100A. 2,3 and 4 poles circuit
switches handle mechanism are obtained to separate the
system at the same time.
Pic-3
Order Codes :
Rated Thermal
Current Ith (A)
1 Pole
40
63
80
100
9RA-00201-0040
9RA-00201-0063
9RA-00201-0080
9RB-00201-0100
2 Poles
9RA-00202-0040
9RA-00202-0063
9RA-00202-0080
9RB-00202-0100
3 Poles
9RA-00203-0040
9RA-00203-0063
9RA-00203-0080
9RB-00203-0100
4 Poles
9RA-00204-0040
9RA-00204-0063
9RA-00204-0080
9RB-00204-0100
Technical Characteristic:
FMS Type
1,2,3,4
AC-22A
40,63,80,100
500 V
6
50/60
12xIn
20xIn
10.000
10,16,25,35
Numbers of Pole
Class
Rated Current
Rated Operational Voltage
Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage - Uimp
Rated Frequency
Short-time withstand current
Short - circuit making capacity
Mechanical life
Min. connection cross-sections
A
V
kV
Hz
A/1s
A/1 s
Operation
mm
2
In
Ui
Ith
GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT DISCONNECTOR GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT DISCONNECTOR
DIMENSIONS OF PHASE-NEUTRAL, MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER, CIRCUIT SWITCH
-2006
6/6
DIMENSIONS OF PHASE-NEUTRAL, MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER, CIRCUIT SWITCH
75
4
5
54
36
18
2
7
7
72
4 poles
3 poles
2 poles
1 pole
FMS Type :
FMB Type :
67
4
5
7
7
18
36
54
72
4 poles
3 poles
2 poles
1 pole
FMN Type :
FMH Type :
66
4
5
9
0
35.5
72
54
36
18
4 poles
3 poles
2 poles
1 pole
67
8
2
4
5
18
7 7
-2006
7/1
FK3/FK30
Residual Current Circuit Breaker Residual Current Circuit Breaker
General Information About Residual Current Circuit Breakers
Technical Table and Control Diagram About Residual Current Circuit Breakers
Dimensions of Residual Current Circuit Breakers
2
3
4
CONTENTS CONTENTS
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKER RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKER
This resistance value decreases to 1 k Ohm and 480 Ohm at
humid and wet ambience respectively.
Voltage-Time curves for normal, humid and wet ambiences
are given below. (Fig-2).
-2006
7/2
Normal conditions : 50 V= 25 mA x 2 k
Humid ambiences : 25 V= 25 mA x 1 k
Wet ambiences : 12 V= 25 mA x 480
A B C
1 2 3 4
10000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
0,1 0,2 0,5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 5001000 2000 500010000
mA Current intensity passing through humanbody 1 (mA)
Current passing time t (s) ms
1. Unfeeling
2. Feeling
3. Nonpermanent damage
4. Permanent
* According to IEC 60947-1, residual current passing
through humanbody-currents passing time
A : Opening relay
M : Opening coil
RA : Protection earth
RB : Operating earth
T : Test button
L1
L2
L3
N
N 1 3 5
M
A
N 2 4 6
RA RB
Effect of voltage
Safety curve of voltage indicates the border between life and
death. The maximum value of this voltage that is not harmful
for humanbeing is calculated, by accepting the threshold value
of residual current as 25 mA and according to the ambience
of the changing interior resistance of humanbody.
The interior resistance of an adult person is 2 k Ohm at normal
conditions.
0,01
0,05
0,10
0,50
1,00
5,00
10,00
Wet Humid Normal condition
Time
(s)
10 12 20 30 50 70 90 200 300 400 500
Voltage (V)
T
Fig-2
Fig-1
Fig-3
As seen from Fig-2, the maximum voltage value to be contacted
continuously of a person without death risk is 50V. At the same
conditions, when a person exposes to 100V, 0.3 second is the
duration to be contacted without death risk.
General
The increase of the usage of the electrical instruments in
houses, businesses and industries is rised the occurrence risk
of residual currents. Nevertheless, every year many people
are being a victim of electrical accidents and 40% of fires are
being occurred as a result of wrong usage of electrical energy.
Because of this fact, the usage of the residual current protection
equipments is compulsory in many countries. Federal Residual
Current Circuit Breakers are manufactured according to TS
EN 61008 standards and CE certificate. The effects of electric
current and voltage on humanbeing and the limited values are
given below.
Effect of high current
Electric current passes through humanbody whoever contacts
with electrical apparatus existing an insulation fault or conductors
under direct energy. The importance of the hazard is dependent
several factors when a current passes through the body.
The main of these;
- Current value
- Duration of passing of current
- Way traced in body
The effects of current passing through humanbody;
1-10 mA : Having pins and needles
10 mA : Beginning of convulsion
20-30 mA : Convulsion of diaphragm
(Suffocation risk)
70-100 mA : Beginning of heart trembling
500 mA : Stopping of heart and death
As seen, even the small amount of current causes the stopping
of heart and at last the death of humanbeing.
30 mA residual current passing through humanbeing exposing
to electricity is the limited value according to IEC 60947-1 for
respiration and blood circulation. (Fig-1).
Operating principle
As seen from Figure-3, phase or phases and neutral are passed
inside a very sensitive toroidal transformer. Everything is normal
if there is no difference between incoming and turning current
and a standstill case of magnetic flux flows on the opening
relay. If a difference current occurs, the magnetic flux on the
opening relay breaks down due to inductive voltage in the
secondary winding of the current transformer. The latch tied to
a natural magnet with a spring is released and gives an opening
signal to opening coil mechanically, with the strength of the
spring. The opening coil interrupts the energy opening the
main contacts. The duration of this operation is less than 30
ms. This simple mechanism is very important for human safety
and so, should be a high-tech product, and the circuit breaker
should repeat the same operation thousand times without
mistake.
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS
7 7
7/3
-2006
Controlling diagram of Residual current circuit breakers:
Type
Rated residual current (mA)
Rated current (A)
Rated voltage (V)
Closing breaking capacity (Im/Im), (A)
Short circuit current with (Inc/Ic), (A)
Frequency (Hz)
Number of pole
Weight (gr)
Standards
30
40, 63
240/415
630
3000
50-60
2, 4
250 (2P), 470 (4P)
IEC 61008-1, BS 4293, CE
300
FK3 FK30
Fig-4
Type
2
4
Number of Pole
30
300
30
300
Nominal Residual
Current (mA)
40
63
40
63
40
63
40
63
Rated Current
9FA-H0002-0040
9FA-H0002-0063
9FA-Y0002-0040
9FA-Y0002-0063
9FA-H0004-0040
9FA-H0004-0063
9FA-Y0004-0040
9FA-Y0004-0063
Order Code
2 pole
4 pole
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
The circuit breaker triped
The circuit breaker reset
Can the
circuit breaker be
reset?
Can
the circuit breaker
be reset ?
Can
the circuit breaker
be reset ?
Can
the circuit breaker
be reseted ?
Temporary breakdown, connection
and connected devices shall be checked
for insulation against the earthing
(Including neutral line)
Fuses are put on circuit one by one.
If circuit breaker get reset position.
There is an insulation break-down in circuit.
To find the reason of the break-down
all equipments are cut off from circuit
Circuit breaker should be reseted again.
There is an insulation fault between
phase and earth or neutral and earth
in connection between circuit breaker
and fuse panel board.
Circuit breaker is
broken-down
The conductors that in the exit
of circuit breaker including
neutral conductors must be
separated to each other.
Broken down is in constant of electrical
installation. To determinate place of
broken-down, the conductors which in
distributions box should be separated
from circuit and tested insulation.
Fuses which after
circuit breaker shall
be cut off circuit
Device which cut off in circuit shall
be connected again one by one.
Devices is broken-down
Which circuit breaker tripped.
TECHNICAL TABLE AND CONTROL DIAGRAM ABOUT RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS TECHNICAL TABLE AND CONTROL DIAGRAM ABOUT RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS
-2006
7/4
68
50
7
1
3
6
4.5
25
35
9
0
4
5
68
50
7
1
3
6
4.5
25
70
9
0
4
5
FK3 - FK30 Type (2 pole) :
FK3 - FK30 Type (4 pole) :
DIMENSIONS OF RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS DIMENSIONS OF RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS
LOW VOLTAGE
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
FAT - 30B
FAT - 40L
FAT - 100L
FAT - 40
FAT - 100
FAT - 130L
FAT - 30
FAT - 60
FAT - 130
General and Technical Information About Low Voltage Current Transformers
Technical Characteristics of Low Voltage Current Transformers
Dimensions of Low Voltage Current Transformers
2
4
5
8/1
LOW VOLTAGE
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
-2006
8 8
L.V. Current Transformers L.V. Current Transformers
CONTENTS CONTENTS
General :
Current transformer is a very useful device because it converts
high AC current to small easily manageable values.
Current transformers consist of primary winding, secondary
winding , magnetic core and insulated body. If current
transformers have no bus bar, they are manufactured without
primary winding. Instead of this, it is possible to constitute
primary winding by passing conductor or busbar inside
toroidal core of transformer.
Federal current transformers are produced according to IEC
185 and IEC 60044-1 standards and CE certificate.
Furthermore, the secondary terminals are under a transparent
seable cover. Low voltage current transformers are
manufactured as of two types for measuring and protection.
8/2
3
5
%50
3
5
%120
3
5
5P
10P
Compound error for
rated current %
1
3
60
18
5
10
Measuring current transformers :
Measuring current transformers are constructed to feed on
other low voltage apparatus such as measuring instruments,
relays, watt-hour meters (kW meter) and these type of current
transformers are mainly used 0.5 and 1 class to transfer the
current from highest rated current to rated secondary current.
Protection current transformers :
Protection current transformers are constructed to feed the
protection relay. These type of current transformers are
mainly used class 3. (Customer supplied when required.)
Current errors and phase shift in protection current transformers: (Fault conditions)
Current errors and phase shift in measuring current transformers :
Accuracy
class
Accuracy
class
percentage ratio of current error for
rated current percentage
Minute Centiradian
permissible ratio error at
various percentage of
rated secondary current
phase shift in various percentages
of rated secondary current
-2006
Accuracy
class
permissible ratio error at various
percentage of rated secondary current
% 20
0,2
0,35
0,75
1,5
0,1
0,2
0,5
1,0
% 5
0,4
0,75
1,5
3,0
% 100
0,1
0,2
0,5
1,0
% 120
0,1
0,2
0,5
1,0
% 5
15
30
90
180
% 20
8
15
45
90
% 100
5
10
30
60
% 120
5
10
30
60
% 5
0,45
0,9
2,7
5,4
% 20
0,24
0,45
1,35
2,7
% 100
0,15
0,3
0,9
1,8
% 120
0,15
0,3
0,9
1,8
phase shift in various percentages of rated secondary current
Minute Centiradian
Current errors and phase shift in measuring current transformers
GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT LOW VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT LOW VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
8 8
8/3
Ratio error of current transformers can be guaranteed between
100% and 120% of rated current.
Error class can be 2-3 folding, especially the value of the
under half rated current at the application, load current can
be t aken i nt o consi derat i on bet ween I n-1, 2I n.
Technical characteristics :
Maximum rated voltage : 720 V
Typical application : Indoor
Continuous operating current : 1,2xIn
Test voltage per minute : 3 kV
Security coefficient : <5
Rated primary current (In) : 30A....3000A
Rated secondery current : 5 A
Operating frequency : 50-60 Hz
Operating temperature : -5/+45C
Thermal rated current : Ith= 100xIn
(for FAT-30B type Ith=60xIn)
Dynamic rated current : Idyn= 2,5xIth
The matters which should be taken into
consideration during the mounting of current
transformer :
Do not open the secondary circuit, when a current is
available in primary.
Current transformers are produced as singlephase
Resistance of current transformer is very low, so that
secondary winding of current transformer can be operated
as a short-circuit, when required in test operation. Otherwise,
this condition causes high voltage and can be dangerous
during usage.
Additional load due to copper cables:
Device power which are connected to current
transformers :
Ammeter
Wattmeter
Cos meter
kWh-meter (active and reactive)
Reactive power control units
Overload relays
Inverse current relays
Secondary thermal relays
0,7 ... 1,5
0,2 ... 5,0
2,0 ... 6,0
0,4 ... 1,0
0,5 ... 1,0
0,2 ... 6,0
2,0
7,2 ... 9,0
Power (VA) Devices
Power losses calculation of cable:
Example: Load connected to current transformer is one
active and reactive kWh-meter with 4 m and 2,5 mm
2
cable
is 1+1+1,43 = 3,43 VA. So it is necessary to use 5 VA current
transformer.
1 m.
2 m.
3 m.
4 m.
5 m.
6 m.
7 m.
8 m.
9 m.
10 m.
Power losses (VA) at secondery current 5A.
10,0 mm
2
0,09
0,18
0,27
0,36
0,44
0,54
0,63
0,71
0,80
0,89
6,0 mm
2
0,15
0,30
0,45
0,60
0,74
0,89
1,04
1,19
1,34
1,49
4,0 mm
2
0,22
0,45
0,67
0,89
1,12
1,34
1,56
1,79
2,01
2,24
2,5 mm
2
0,36
0,71
1,07
1,43
1,78
2,14
2,50
2,86
3,21
3,57
P=
Sx56
(VA)
= cable length of secondary side (m)
Isn = seconder rated current (A)
S = cross section of cupper cable (mm
2
)
P = power losses (VA)
Cable (Cu)
Isn x 2
magnetic saturation
rated load
1/4 load (M5) 1/4 load (M2)
overload range
(measuring)
overload
range
(protection)
rated current
full load
(M2)
M5
M5
10P5
10P10
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
F
%
Fi
%
(+)
1,0 1,2 2,0 3,0 4,0 5,0 6,0 9,0 10,0
1N
005 02
c
u
r
r
e
n
t

f
a
i
l
u
r
e
(-)
M5
Fig-1 Showing ratio error for measuring and protection current transformer at multiples rated current
-2006
GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT LOW VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT LOW VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
8/4
-2006
Note : Federal mark LV current transformers have a sealing feature.
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
30/5
40/5
50/5
60/5
75/5
80/5
100/5
125/5
150/5
200/5
250/5
FAT-30B
FAT-30B
FAT-30B
FAT-30B
FAT-30B
FAT-30B
FAT-30B
FAT-30B
FAT-30B
FAT-30B
FAT-30B
0,60
0,60
0,60
0,60
0,60
0,60
0,60
0,60
0,60
0,60
0,60
9GA-005-0030
9GA-005-0040
9GA-005-0050
9GA-005-0060
9GA-005-0075
9GA-005-0080
9GA-005-0100
9GA-005-0125
9GA-005-0150
9GA-005-0200
9GA-005-0250
FAT - 30B
WITH BUSBAR
WINDOWS TYPE
30
30
30
35
35
35
35
35
35
0,38
0,38
0,38
0,60
0,60
0,60
0,60
0,60
0,60
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
300/5
400/5
500/5
200/5
250/5
300/5
400/5
500/5
600/5
FAT-40
FAT-40
FAT-40
FAT-40L
FAT-40L
FAT-40L
FAT-40L
FAT-40L
FAT-40L
9GC-005-0300
9GC-005-0400
9GC-005-0500
9GK-005-0200
9GK-005-0250
9GK-005-0300
9GK-005-0400
9GK-005-0500
9GK-005-0600
FAT - 40 FAT - 40L
WINDOWS TYPE
Busbar Dimensions: 80 x 30, 100 x 10 mm. for FAT100
80 x 30, 100 x 20 mm. for FAT 100L
FAT - 100L FAT - 100
WINDOWS TYPE
105
105
105
135
135
135
135
135
135
135
1,50
1,50
1,50
1,50
1,50
1,50
1,50
1,50
1,50
1,50
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
1500/5
2000/5
2500/5
3000/5
4000/5
1500/5
2000/5
2500/5
3000/5
4000/5
FAT-130
FAT-130
FAT-130
FAT-130
FAT-130
FAT-130L
FAT-130L
FAT-130L
FAT-130L
FAT-130L
9GN-005-1500
9GN-005-2000
9GN-005-2500
9GN-005-3000
9GN-005-4000
9GM-005-1500
9GM-005-2000
9GM-005-2500
9GM-005-3000
9GM-005-4000
FAT - 130 FAT - 130L
WINDOWS TYPE
10 , 15
10 , 15
10 , 15
15
Busbar Dimensions: 60 x 20 mm.
40
40
40
40
0,60
0,60
0,60
0,60
10 , 15
10 , 15
10 , 15
15
600/5
750/5
800/5
1000/5
FAT-60
FAT-60
FAT-60
FAT-60
9GD-005-0600
9GD-005-0750
9GD-005-0800
9GD-005-1000
FAT - 60
23
23
23
23
5
5 , 10
5 , 10
5 , 10
-
-
5 , 10
5 , 10
100/5
150/5
200/5
250/5
FAT-30
FAT-30
FAT-30
FAT-30
WINDOWS TYPE Busbar Dimensions: 30 x 10 mm.
0,60
0,60
0,60
0,60
9GB-005-0100
9GB-005-0150
9GB-005-0200
9GB-005-0250
FAT - 30
Class:1 Class:0,5
Rated
current
(A)
Type Rated power (VA) Weight
(kg)
Order codes
For class 0.5: A

For class 1 : B
For 5VA : 2
For 10 VA : 4
For 15 VA : 5
Rated power (VA) Cable
(max) mm.
Weight
(kg)
Class:1 Class:0,5
Rated
current
(A)
Type
Order codes
For class 0.5: A

For class 1 : B
For 5VA : 2
For 10 VA : 4
For 15 VA : 5
(max) mm.
Weight
(kg)
Class:1 Class:0,5
Rated
current
(A)
Type
Order codes
For class 0.5: A

For class 1 : B
For 5VA : 2
For 10 VA : 4
For 15 VA : 5
(max) mm.
Weight
(kg)
Class:1 Class:0,5
Rated
current
(A)
Type
Order codes
For class 0.5: A

For class 1 : B
For 5VA : 2
For 10 VA : 4
For 15 VA : 5
(max) mm.
Weight
(kg)
Class:1 Class:0,5
Rated
current
(A)
Type
Order codes
For class 0.5: A

For class 1 : B
For 5VA : 2
For 10 VA : 4
For 15 VA : 5
(max) mm.
Weight
(kg)
Class:1 Class:0,5
Rated
current
(A)
Type
Order codes
For class 0.5: A

For class 1 : B
For 5VA : 2
For 10 VA : 4
For 15 VA : 5
Busbar Dimensions: 40 x 10 mm.
Busbar Dimensions: 110 x 60 ; 2(110 x 20) mm.
for FAT130 135 x 40 mm. for FAT 130L
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
80
80
80
80
80
80
0,70
0,72
0,80
0,83
0,94
1,10
1,16
0,90
0,90
0,90
0,90
1,00
1,00
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
10
10
10
10
10
10
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
10
10
10
10
10
10
1200/5
1250/5
1500/5
1600/5
2000/5
2500/5
3000/5
500/5
600/5
750/5
800/5
1000/5
1500/5
FAT-100
FAT-100
FAT-100
FAT-100
FAT-100
FAT-100
FAT-100
FAT-100L
FAT-100L
FAT-100L
FAT-100L
FAT-100L
FAT-100L
9GE-005-1200
9GE-005-1250
9GE-005-1500
9GE-005-1600
9GE-005-2000
9GE-005-2500
9GE-005-3000
9GL-005-0500
9GL-005-0600
9GL-005-0750
9GL-005-0800
9GL-005-1000
9GL-005-1500
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS of LOW VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS of LOW VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
DIMENSIONS of LOW VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
8/5
-2006
FAT - 30
FAT - 30B
FAT - 40
FAT - 60
FAT - 40L
(
*
) Busbar connection apparatus
is delivered in the box.
(
*
(
*
(
*
With bar:
Installation screws (M8x20) which
are used on the busbar are delivered
with the current transformers.
1
6
.
5
1
0
3
.
5
2
118
4
3
.
5
8
7
48
6
4
8
5
5
7
1
8
7
.
5
59
8
87.5
1
1
2
1
58.5
87
4
3
.
5
4
3
.
5
1
6
.
5
1
0
4

2
3
.
6
3
1
(
*
)
58.5
4
8
5
6
5
7
6
4
1
.
5
1
0
.
7
5
45
78
4
1
4
1
1
7
9
9

3
1
(
*
)
45
4
2
5
6
5
7
6
75
40
9
9
1
1
42
(
*
)

3
5
4
2
.
5
4
2
.
5
1
4
7
5
6
0
40
6
2
1
42
103.5
61
5
6
5
6
1
2
7
.
5
1
5
.
5

4
6
(
*
)
4
4
.
5
5
5
.
5
5
7
.
5
42
6
DIMENSIONS of LOW VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
8 8
8/6
-2006
FAT - 130
FAT - 100
FAT - 130L
FAT - 100L
(
*
(
*
(
*
(
*
3
2
1
0
.
5
80.5
146.5
101
6
8
1
5
5
7
2
1
5

6
2
(
*
)
80.5
4
4
5
4
5
7
6
1
3
6
3
2
102.5
80
(
*
)
2
2

8
1
6
0
.
5
6
0
.
5
1
5
132.5
8
2
7
0
80
8
7
.
5
6
1
9
9
1
1
0
6
0
(
*
)
9
2
.
5
9
2
.
5
110
100
14
170

1
0
5
4
1
100
5
6
7
0
6
1
7
0
4
2
135
100
(
*
)
7
8
7
8
1
4
170

1
3
5
100
7
0
8
1
8
3
6
DIMENSIONS of LOW VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS DIMENSIONS of LOW VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
9 9
CAM SWITCHES
ON-OFF Switches Change Over Switches Star Delta Starters
Ammeter
Switches
Motor Reversing
Switches
Voltmeter
Switches
-2006
General and Technical Information About Cam Switches
Types of Cam Switches
Dimensions of Cam Switches
2
3
4
9/1
CAM SWITCHES
Cam Switches Cam Switches
CONTENTS CONTENTS
-2006
9/2
Cam switches are composed of identical contact bearings arranged
in a row on a mile. Cam switches are used in motor connections,
panelmeter switching, control and distribution panels. Federal
cam switches are manufacturing according to IEC 60947-3 / EN
60947-3 standards and CE certificate.
Cam switches are manual operated switches. Contactor and
relays are used in controlling medium and high powered motors,
but controlling low power motors is made by cam switches as
they are simple and economic.
Cam switches have two, three or four silver coated contacts in
each section and cam switches can be used in different controlling
operations by increasing the number of sections. As the camshafts
make the contacts work at the same time, contolling of all circuits
or phases can be done safely at the same time without any delay.
General :
General Table :
ON - OFF Switches :
Rated Thermal
Current Ith (A)
Number of
Pole - Stages
Front Plate Connecting
Diagram
Order Codes
FCS1
FCS2
10
16
20
25
32
63
9TO10000
9TO20000
0
1
3
1 Pole - 1 Stage
2 Pole - 1 Stage
3 Pole - 2 Stages
4 Pole - 2 Stages
Type
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
Stage 1 Stages 2
Number of Pole, Front Plate, Rated Thermal Current, for example :
Back Plate
Switch
Front Plate
Handle
Picture-1
9TO103020020
ON-OFF Switches
3 Pole
20A
ON OF F
AC1
AC15
AC21A
AC23A
AC3
220-240 V
380-440 V
660-690 V
220-240 V
380-440 V
660-690 V
220-240 V
380-440 V
660-690 V
220-240 V
380-440 V
660-690 V
220-240 V
380-440 V
660-690 V
1p
3p
1p
3p
1p
3p
1p
3p
1p
3p
1p
3p
Rated Thermal
Current Ith (A)
Type FCS1
Rated Insulation Voltage
Ui (V) 50-60 Hz
FCS2
Rated Operating Current (A) for
Rated Operating Power (kW) for
Protection Fuses gL/gG (A)
Cam Switches
IEC 60947-3
EN 60947-3
63
40
25
20
12
-
63
11
15
15
25
15
25
5.5
11
10
18.5
10
18.5
80
63
690
32
20
13
10
6
-
32
3.5
7.5
3.8
10
13
5.5
3
5.5
3.5
7.5
5
10
40
32
690
25
690
25
16
10
7.5
5
-
25
3
6
5
10
5
10
3
5
5
8
5
8
32
20
13
8
6
4
-
20
2.5
3.7
3.7
7.5
4
7.5
2.2
3
3
5.5
3
5.5
25
20
690
16
10
6
5
4
-
16
2
3.7
3
6
3
6.5
2
3
3
5
3
5.2
20
16
690
10
6
4
3
2
-
10
1.25
2.2
2
3.7
2
3.7
1
1.8
2
3
2
3
16
10
690
Utilization
classes
GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT CAM SWITCHES GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT CAM SWITCHES
0 1 ON OF F
1 2
9 9
-2006
9/3
TYPES of CAM SWITCHES TYPES of CAM SWITCHES
Change Over Switches :
Rated Thermal
Current Ith (A)
Front Plate Connecting Diagram Order Codes
FCS1
FCS2
10
16
20
25
32
63
9TK100400
9TK200400
Number of Pole, Rated Thermal Current
1 2
4
0
Number of
Pole - Stages
1 Pole - 1 Stage
3 Pole - 2 Stages
Voltmeter Switches :
Function Number of
Stages
Diagram
Order Codes
FCS1 20
9TV123V10020
9TV143V20020
3 Phase
3 Wires
VOLTMETER
O
TR RS
ST
VOLTMETER
OFF
RS
ST
RN
SN
TN TR
Star Delta Starters :
Rated Thermal
Current Ith (A)
Number of
Pole - Stages
Diagram
Order Codes
FCS1
16
25
9TS100500
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
L1
1V
1W
2V
2W
1U
2U
L2
L3
0 1 2
0
Motor Reversing Switches :
Diagram
Order Codes
FCS1
10
16
20
25
9TE100600
OFF
FWD REV
Number of Pole, Rated Thermal Current
V
W
R
S
T
FWD OFF REV
U
3 Pole - 4 Stages
Number of
Pole - Stages
1 Pole - 2 Stages
3 Pole - 4 Stages
Type
Type
Type
Type
2 Stages
3 Stages
3 Phase
4 Wires
Rated Thermal
Current Ith (A)
Rated Thermal
Current Ith (A)
1 3 5 7 9 11
2,4 6,8 10,12
2 Stage 3 Stage 1 Stage
R-S
T --------
S --------
R --------
N --------
S-T T-R R-N S-N T-N O
V2
V1
5
7
9
11
V
4
8
O RS ST TR
R 2
4
T 6
S 8
1
3
5
7
V1
V2 V
Ammeter Switches :
FCS1
20
9TA1030370020 3 Pole - 4 Stages
Function Number of
Stages
Diagram
Order Codes
Type
Rated Thermal
Current Ith (A)
6
5
FWD OFF REV
R
6
5
S
V1
V2
7
0
S
T R
-2006
9/4
General dimensions of FCS1 type switches :
General dimensions of FCS2 type switches :
Dimensions of FCS1 type voltmeter - Ammeter switches :
Number of Stages
FCS1 Body Lenght (L1)
FCS2 Body Lenght(L2)
1
31.5
49
2
41
70.5
3
50.5
92
4
60
113.5
Cam Switches Body Lenghts :
DIMENSIONS of CAM SWITCHES DIMENSIONS of CAM SWITCHES
CONTENTS
H .C. Contactors
Semiconductor
Contactors
Contactors for
Capacitor Switching
CONTACTORS
H .C. Contactors
300 - 2500 A
For 5 - 70 kVAr
6 - 300 A
Contactors for
Capacitor Switching
Semiconductor
Contactors
15 - 30 A
-2006
10/1
General Information About Contactors
Selection of Contactors for Utilization Categories
Technical Characteristics of Contactors
Selection of Contactors According to Electrical Life
Table of Cross Section for Contactors
Utilization Categories for Contactors
Contactors Damages and Repairs
Underload Average Motor Currents
Contactor for Capacitor Switching
Order Codes of Contactors
Dimensions of Relevant Contactors
General Information About Semiconductor Contactors
General Information and Dimensions of Semiconductor Contactors
General Information About AC/DC High Current Contactors
Technical Characteristics of AC/DC High Current Contactors
AC-DC Connection Diagrams of High Current Contactors
Dimensions of AC/DC High Current Contactors
2
3
4
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
CONTENTS
CONTACTORS
10 10
Contactors Contactors
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT CONTACTORS
-2006
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT CONTACTORS
General :
Contactors provide remote control of primarily electric motors
and compensation & heating systems by cable. They protect
the instruments and foundations against overload currents
by using thermal relays.
Federal contactors are manufactured in according to IEC
60947-4-1/EN 60947-4-1 standards and CE certificate. Main
and auxiliary contacts, coil and auxiliary contact blocks are
easily installed and removed. FC type contactors have coil
with three points, thus connection flexibility has been provided.
The coils of contactors are safely controlled between 0,8 and
1,1 times of their rated coil voltage. They operate at full
performance in the ambient temperature of -5 0 C and +55
0 C. The ability of assembling contactors to rails provides a
great facility during installation. The ingredient of the material
provides a resistance to an insulation voltage of 1000V.
General Characteristics :
Acceptable continual thermal current Ith:
Acceptable thermal current current is the biggest test value
that will be used at increasing temperature for the IEC 60947-
4-1. This test is bases on current applications of 8 hours PVC
- Motor rated power (kW) ,
- Operating voltage
- Type of operating motor
10/2
1-Contactor should have the high current value without
being exposed to and damaged or boiling. This belongs to
the quality of contactors. (Contact surface quality and weld
technology) Especially at AC-3 and capacitor command,
selectivity of contactor is very important.
2-Current which passes through the contacts causes warming
when the contactor is closed. This warming is limited with
the standarts. For IEC 60947-4-1 when continual thermal
current (Ith) is passed through the main contacts, maximum
i ncreasi ng temperature shoul d not exceed 65K.
3-While the contactor is cutting the current, electrical arc
occurs between the seperated contacts. Arc is the result of
the thermal impression of electron and ion current which
broke off the contact material. Temperature of the arc reaches
to thousands of degrees and this temperature is too high
for metals and insulators which are used at contact making
and cutting cells. Therefore, arc should end as soon as
possible. For this reason separators are used inside of
contactors.
Selection of contactors :
Most important point at the selection contactors is to known
load and retain instantaneous load characteristic magnitude.
To select contactors the following criterion should be taken
into consideration.
Rated operating voltage (Ue),
Rated operating current (le),
Rated coil voltage,
Rated breaking current (lc),
b. Slip-ring motors :
Contactors are to be selected individually for stator and rotor.
Selection of stator contactor is made in compliance with Ith
thermal current. Selection of rotor contactor duty is characterized
by making, operating (starting, regulating) insulating (earthing),
type of application (intermittent or final contactor) condition.
insulated copper conductors which are passes through
contactor terminal. In this case changing temperature of
contactor terminals (Q) should not exceed 65K.
Closing Capacity :
Closing Capacity is the current value which the contactor
close the contacts without any damaging. Power factorr and
frequency of closing are the factors that effect to capacity
of closing. According IEC 60947-4-1 standards for AC3
utilization class, if le is the maximum motor operating current
closing capacity should be 10xle.
Electrical Life :
Electrical Resistance is the number of maximum opening
closing when the load currents passes through contactors
poles without needed care. Electrical Resistance is deter-
minated at the result of the tests which are made at various
classes.
AC 1: Resistive loads
Closed current= broken current=le
AC 3: squirrel-cage or slip-rings asynchronous motors
working discontinuous and applications of current brake.
Closed current=broken current= 6le.
Mechanical Life :
Maximum opening and closing numbers which only feed
the coil, without passing the current through from the main
poles of contactor, determinate the mechanic resistance of
contactor.
Breaking Capacity :
Breaking Capacity is the current value which contactor
contacts and arc extinguisher cells are broken successfully
and undamaged when the voltage value increases, breaking
capacity dicreases. At IEC 60947-4-1 for AC 3 using class,
If le is the motor current, breaking capacity should be 8 x
le. Breaking capacity = 8 x le.
c. Contactors for starting AC motors :
At the direct running: Selection is made according to motor
nominal power for AC3 class. At the star-delta running
without load: Star contactor breaks approximately 1/3 of
rated current of motor and depends on motor is 1/3 of rated
motor power. Main line and delta contactors are connected
in series to motor winding and during the running are pulled
1/ of motor power. Thus motor power is 1/ of motor
power.
For selection a contactor it is essential to determine below:
- Rated operating voltage (Ue) ,
- Rated operating current (le),
- Motor starting current (lc=m x le),
- Operating frequency (K)
- Number of operation.
Selection contactor for motors:
a. Squirrel-cage asynchronous motors :
Above mentioned technical data for selection contactor
should be retained and :
SELECTION OF CONTACTORS SELECTION OF CONTACTORS
SELECTION of CONTACTORS for UTILIZATION CATEGORIES
In the contactor the resistive loads have negligible effect
during the making and breaking of the current , because
only rated current passes through it.The heating of the
contactor increases as the number of switching (opening-
closing) increases.In other words the heating of the contactor
increases as the number of switching. For this reason it is
suggested that during calculation to use the rated current
value less than the actual value. Usually the feeding of single
phase in heating circuit for 3 phase contactor, it is necessary
to use 2 or 3 pole in series. If 3 poles are in series, the rated
operational current should be 1.6Ie and if 2 poles are in
series, it should be 2Ie.
When operating on a DC circuit, elimination of arc is more
difficult than operating on an AC circuit. Selection of
contactor, it is essential to know the current and breaking
voltage as well as the time constant (L/R) of the power circuit
controlled by the contactor. For information, conventional
val ues of t i me-const ant s are st at ed as f ol l ow:
- Non-inductive load such as resistance furnaces=(L/R)=1ms
- Shunt motor = L/R = 7,5 ms
- Series motor = L/R = 10 ms
- Electro magnet = L/R = 300 ms
Important criteria at the switching of inductive DC load is
type of voltage (omic or inductive) and switching frequency.
SELECTION of CONTACTORS for UTILIZATION CATEGORIES
-2006
- Type of lamps
- Connection
- Whether capacitor switching (with or without factor correction)
Installation of incandescent lamp, when contactor energises,
the operating current reaches to 15 fold of rated current. So
the rated current is equal to the breaking current.
Capacitor switching is so important at discharge and
fluorescant lamps.
Current is pulled 2 fold of operating current at a high pressure
mercury vapour lamps approximately 5 minutes for previously
heating time. Previously heating time is 10 minutes for halogen
and sodium vapour lamp.
f. Capacitor switching application :
While switching on a capacitive circuit, a high frequency
(1...15hz) and l arge transi ent current peaks are
produced.Switching of capacitor for a single or one of the
capacitor banks are different from each other.Step by step
switching on operation is more difficult for contactor than
capacitor bank. Because during this operation for capacitor
bank, compensated current occurs. For this reason selecting
of a suitable contactors the compensating current must be
taken i nto consi derati on for 50kVAr and above,
and for less than 50 kVAr can be omitted.
10/3
e. Resistive loads :
d. Selection contactors for DC circuit :
However star-delta contactors are used to limit a starting
moment, during the whole load starting. So after starting, delta
contactor pulls high current in the result of making switching
at the low speed of motor. So that star contactors are to be
selected as an equal of motor power.
The table below mentions the contactors type depending on
the on-load and thermal current range factor.
Selecting contactor for squirrel-cage asynchronous
Main contactor current=Ie Direct running
Normal star-delta
runnig
With impedance
running
With autotransformer
running
Main contactor : 0,58 Ie
Delta contactor : 0,58 Ie
Star contactor : 0,58 Ie
Passing contactor : 0,30 Ie
Main contactor : Ie
Starting contactor : 0,7 Ie
Main contactor : Ie
Transformer contactor : Ie
Star contactor : 0,5 Ie
g. Lighting installation applications :
Time after time strike voltage and current can force the contactor
at the applications of lighting. When selection of contactors,
the following criterias should be taken into consideration :
Selecting a contactor at the direct starting squirrel-cage asynchronous
motors :
Selecting a contactor with star-delta starting squirrel-cage asyncronous motors :
FC09D
FC09D
FC09D
FC09D
FC09D
FC09D
FC09D
FC09D
FC12D
FC18D
FC25D
FC25D
FC32D
FC40D
FC50D
FC65D
FC80D
FC95D
FC115D
FC150D
FC220D
FC260D
FC260D
FC300D
Threephase 380/400V
kW In (A)
0,37
0,55
0,75
1,1
1,5
2,2
3
4
5,5
7,5
9
11
15
18,5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
1,03
1,6
2
2,6
3,5
5
6,6
8,5
11,5
15,5
18,5
22
30
37
44
60
72
85
105
138
170
205
245
300
Termal Relay
Range
(A)
1 - 1,6
1,25 - 2
1,6 - 2,5
2,5 -4
2,8 - 4
4,5 - 6,3
5,5 - 8
7 - 10
9 - 12,5
14 - 20
17 - 22
20 - 25
23 - 32
30 - 40
37 - 50
55 - 70
63 - 80
75 - 105
95 - 125
100 - 160
125 - 200
200 - 315
200 - 315
250 - 400
Suitable FEDERAL
Contactor
380/400V
7,5
9
11
15
18,5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
15,5
18,5
22
30
37
44
60
72
85
105
138
170
205
245
300
370
408
kW In (A)
7-10
9-12,5
11-16
14-20
20-25
23-32
30-40
38-50
48-57
57-66
63-80
75-105
100-160
100-160
125-200
200-315
200-315
Termal Relay
Range
(A) Line Delta Star
FC12D
FC12D
FC12D
FC18D
FC18D
FC32D
FC50D
FC50D
FC50D
FC65D
FC80D
FC150D
FC150D
FC220D
FC220D
FC260D
FC260D
FC12D
FC12D
FC12D
FC18D
FC18D
FC32D
FC40D
FC50D
FC50D
FC65D
FC80D
FC150D
FC150D
FC220D
FC220D
FC260D
FC260D
FC09D
FC09D
FC09D
FC09D
FC09D
FC18D
FC25D
FC32D
FC32D
FC50D
FC50D
FC80D
FC80D
FC150D
FC150D
FC220D
FC220D
Suitable FEDERAL Contactor
10 10
-2006
Type
Utility Class : AC3
Ie max Ue 440 V
Utility Class : AC1
Ie max 40 C
220 / 230 V
380 / 400 V
415 V
500 V
660 / 690 V
220 / 230 V
380 / 400 V
415 V
500 V
660 / 690 V
Motor Control
3 ~ AC3
Startup
Stopping
Auxiliary contact number
A
mm
2
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
Note: Auxiliary contact blocks are fixed to front side of contactor. NO : Normally open contact NC : Normally closed contact
Connection conductor cross section
max
Contactors
TS EN 60947-4-1
IEC 60947-4-1
EN 60947-4-1
FC - 25D FC - 18D FC - 12D FC - 09D
Rated insulation voltage - Ui (a.c.) 50-60 Hz V
Rated impulse withstand voltage - Uimp kV
Motor Control
3 ~ AC4
Startup
Direction changing
Stepping
32
50
10
1000
8
7,5
15
15
18,5
18,5
3,7
7,5
7,5
9
11
0,55
FC - 32D
Weight
1 NO
or 1 NC
1 NO
or 1 NC
1 NO
or 1 NC
1 NO
or 1 NC
1 NO
or 1 NC
25
40
10
1000
8
5,5
11
11
15
15
3
5,5
5,5
7,5
10
0,52
18
32
6
1000
8
4
7,5
9
10
10
1,5
3,7
3,7
5,5
7,5
0,345
12
25
4
1000
8
3
5,5
5,5
7,5
7,5
1,5
3
3
4
5,5
0,33
9
25
4
1000
8
2,2
4
4
5,5
5,5
1,1
2,2
2,2
3
4
0,33
A
(Ith)
FC - 09M
9
16
2,5
690
8
2,2
4
4
4
4
1,1
2,2
2,2
2,2
2,2
0,16
FC - 06M
6
16
2,5
690
8
1,5
2,2
2,2
3
3
0,75
1,1
1,1
1,5
1,5
0,16
1 NO
or 1 NC
1 NO
or 1 NC
Easily changeable coils
FCC-D2 FCC-D4 FCC-D0
Auxiliary contact blocks (Front Assembling)
1. NO contact number
2. NC contact number
FCB-F20
FCB-F02
FCB-F11
FCB-F40
FCB-F31
FCB-F22
FCB-F13
FCB-F04
Auxiliary contact blocks (Side Assembling)
1. NO contact number
2. NC contact number
FCAB-F11
FCAB-F20
FCAB-F02
Mechanical lock
10/4
Connection terminal tightening torque Nm 1 0,5
min. max. min. max. min. max. min. max. min. max. min. max.
1 0,5 1,5 1 1,5 1 1,5 1 2 1,2
min. max.
2 1,2
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CONTACTORS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CONTACTORS
-2006 10/5
40
60
25
1000
8
11
18,5
22
22
30
4
9
9
11
15
1,12
50
80
25
1000
8
15
22
25
30
33
5,5
11
11
15
18,5
1,13
65
80
25
1000
8
18,5
30
37
37
37
7,5
15
15
18,5
22
1,14
80
125
50
1000
8
22
37
45
55
45
9
18,5
18,5
22
25
1,37
95
125
50
1000
8
25
45
45
55
45
11
22
18,5
22
25
1,38
115
200
95
1000
8
30
55
59
75
80
15
25
30
33
45
2,4
150
200
95
1000
8
40
75
80
90
100
18,5
30
33
40
55
2,4
FC - 40D FC - 50D FC - 65D FC - 80D FC - 95D FC - 115D FC - 150D
1 NO
+ 1 NC
1 NO
+ 1 NC
1 NO
+ 1 NC
1 NO
+ 1 NC
1 NO
+ 1 NC
220
300
185
1000
8
60
110
116
132
160
30
50
50
60
80
7,2
FC - 220D
260
300
185
1000
8
80
140
140
180
200
40
65
65
80
100
7,3
FC - 260D
300
350
185
1000
8
90
160
160
200
250
45
75
75
95
120
7,4
FC - 300D
FCB-F20
FCB-F02
FCB-F11
FCB-F40
FCB-F31
FCB-F22
FCB-F13
FCB-F04
FCAB-F11
FCAB-F20
FCAB-F02
FCC-D6 FCC-D8 FCC-D10
min. max.
4,5 3,5
min. max.
4,5 3,5
min. max.
4,5 3,5
min. max.
12,5 4
min. max.
12,5 4
min. max.
10 6
min. max.
10 6
min. max.
14 10
min. max.
14 10
min. max.
14 10
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CONTACTORS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CONTACTORS
10 10
-2006
10/6
TABLE OF CROSS SECTION FOR CONTACTORS
Connection Cross Section :
1...4
1...4
1...2,5
2...6
2...10
1...2,5
2...10
1...2,5
2,5...25
1...2,5
4...50
4...95
4...185
1...6
1...6
1...2,5
1,5...6
1,5...6
1...2,5
1,5...10
1...2,5
2,5...25
1...2,5
4...50
4...95
4...185
1...4 + 1...4
1...4 + 1...4
1...2,5 + 1...2,5
1,5...6 + 1,5...6
1,5...6 + 1,5...6
1...2,5 + 1...2,5
4...10 + 4...10
1...2,5 + 1...2,5
2,5...16 + 2,5...16
1...2,5 + 1...2,5
4...35 + 4...35
4...50 + 4...50
4...95 + 4...95
1...6 + 1...6
1...6 + 1...6
1...2,5 + 1...2,5
1,5...6 + 1,5...6
1,5...6 + 1,5...6
1...2,5 + 1...2,5
2,5...10 + 2,5...10
1...2,5 + 1...2,5
4...16 + 4...16
1...2,5 + 1...2,5
16...35 + 16...35
16...50 + 16...50
4...95 + 4...95
8
8
8
10
10
8
12
8
32
Min. and max.
connection
cross section
(mm
2
)
FC - 09D
FC - 12D
FC - 18D
FC - 25D
FC - 32D
FC - 40D
FC - 50D
FC - 65D
FC - 80D
FC - 95D
FC - 115D
FC - 150D
FC - 220D
FC - 260D
FC - 300D
mm
2
mm
2
mm
2
mm
2
mm
Main
Contact
Auxiliary
Contact
Selection of contactor according to electrical life (for Ue 440 V AC-3 class) Power according to operating voltage at 50 Hz
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1,5
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Breaking current
M
i
l
l
i
o
n

o
p
e
n
i
n
g
-
c
l
o
s
i
n
g
F
C
-
0
9
D
F
C
-
1
2
D
F
C
-
1
8
D
F
C
-
2
5
D
F
C
-
3
2
D
F
C
-
4
0
D
F
C
-
5
0
D
F
C
-
6
5
D
F
C
-
8
0
D
F
C
-
1
1
5
D
F
C
-
0
6
M
F
C
-
0
9
M
F
C
-
9
0
D
F
C
-
1
5
0
D
120 150 200 250
F
C
-
2
2
0
D
F
C
-
2
6
0
D
F
C
-
3
0
0
D
SELECTION OF CONTACTORS ACCORDING TO ELECTRICAL LIFE SELECTION OF CONTACTORS ACCORDING TO ELECTRICAL LIFE
AC (Alternative Current) DC (Direct Current)
AC - 12: Control of resistive loads and solid state loads with
isolation by optocouplers
AC - 13:Control of solid state loads with transformer isolation
AC - 14:Control of small electromagnetic loads (<72 VA)
AC - 15:Control of a.c. electromagnetic loads (<72VA)
DC - 12: Control of resistive loads and solid state loads with
isolation by optocouplers
DC - 13:Control of d.c. electromagnets
DC - 14:Control of d.c. electromagnetic loads having economy
resistors in circuit
-2006
10/7
Kind of
current
AC
DC
Utilization
categories
AC - 1
AC - 2
AC - 3
AC - 4
AC - 5a
AC - 5b
AC - 6a
AC - 6b
AC - 8a
AC - 8b
DC - 1
DC - 3
DC - 5
DC - 6
Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces
Slip-ring motors : Starting, switching off
Squirrel-cage motors : Starting , switching off motors during running (1)
Squirrel-cage motors :Starting, plugging, inching
Switching of electric discharge lamp controls
Switching of incandescant lamps
Switching of transformers
Switching of capacitor banks
Hermetic refrigerant compressor motor (2) control with manuel resetting of overload releases
Hermetic refrigerant compressor motor (2) control with automatic resetting of overload releases
Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces
Shunt motors : Starting , plugging, inching, dynamic breaking of dc motors
Series motors : Starting , plugging, inching, dynamic breaking of dc motors
Switching of incandescent lamps
Typical Applications
a. Utilization categories for contactors according to IEC 60947-4-1 :
AC4 class :
This category includes the squirrel-cage or slip-ring motors
discontinuous operating and opposite current braking.
Contactor opens motors rated current at going forward
current which is greater than 5..7 times and closes. At low
speed, breaking occurs in hard situation. Examples, pressing
machines, wire and cabin machines, discontinious operating
set counters, mettallurg, rising, electrovalvesetc.
Determination of correct utilization category and making the
selection suitable for this category, is the most important
point for contactor to work healthy.
Utilization Categories :
The international standard for contactors which is known as
IEC 60158-4-1 today leaves its position to IEC 60947-4-1
standard. Utilization categories clarifies the closing current,
breaking current and power factor for the application. AC
utilization categories are revelant with alternative current,
DC utilization categories are revelant with direct current. At
IEC 60158 standart AC1, AC2, AC3, AC4 is clarified at IEC
60947-4-1 standarts AC5 to AC8 new classes stage lighting
lamps, transformers, capacitor units and cooling
compressors.
AC1 class :
This category includes alternetive current loads which has
min %95 power factor. We can show heating applications
as an example to this.
AC2 class :
This category includes going forward, braking with the
opposite current and steply operating of slip-ring
asynchronous motors. At closing time a current which is 2,5
times bigger than rated current passes through the contacts.
Contactor should break the rising voltage mostly at an equal
value to standart voltage at opening time. We can show
raising and metallurgy applications as an example for this.
AC3 class :
This is the widest spread application class. This category
includes the squirrel-cage asynchronous motors which arent
put into use when they are operating after going forward.
On closing time motor rising current which is greater 57
times than motors rated current passes through the
contactors contacts. Contactor will open the rated current
which motor pulls at opening time. Voltage between this
contactor poles is %20 of the nominal voltage.This is an
easily breaking position. We can show all standard squirrel
cage and slip-ring asynchromous motors stator and stator
command, lifts, escalators, conveyors, pumps, ventilations,
mixers, air conditioners, refrigerators, valves as examples.
b. Utilization categories for contactors in controlling circuits according to IEC 60947-5-1
Descriptions :
For rapid breaking motor is fed by reverse current or is changed rotating direction by inverting the points of two phase.
Stepping operating : Motor should be operated intermittently.
UTILIZATION CATEGORIES for CONTACTORS UTILIZATION CATEGORIES for CONTACTORS
10 10
-2006
10/8
(1) The test can be realized by incandescent load.
(2) 6P (W) value is supplied by ampric formula and P = 50 W or (6P) = 300ms represent DC magnetic loads.
Test characteristics table for AC-DC application according to standard using class :
Opening Closed Opening
Acceptable operating according to using class
AC - 1
AC - 2
AC - 3
AC - 4
AC - 5a
AC - 5b
AC - 14
AC - 15
Category
DC - 1
DC - 3
DC - 5
DC - 6
Category
DC - 13
Category
for all of values
for all of values
Ie<17A
Ie17A
Ie<17A
Ie17A
for all of values
for all of values
for all of values
for all of values
Ie
for all of values
for all of values
for all of values
for all of values
Ie
for all of values
Ie
0,95
0,65
0,65
0,35
0,65
0,35
0,45
(1)
0,3
0,3
L/R (ms)
1
2
7,5
(1)
T0,95
6P (2)
1
1
0,17
0,17
1
1
1
1
1
1
Ur/Ue
1
1
1
1
Ur/Ue
1
1
2,5
1
1
6
6
2
1
1
1
Ic/Ie
1
2,5
2,5
1
Ic/Ie
1
Ic/Ie Ur/Ue Ie
0,8
0,65
0,45
0,35
0,45
0,35
0,45
(1)
0,7
0,3
L/R (ms)
1
2,5
15
(1)
T0,95
6P (2)
1,05
1,05
1,05
1,05
1,05
1,05
1,05
1,05
1,1
1,1
U/Ue
1,05
1,05
1,05
1,05
U/Ue
1,1
1,5
4
10
10
12
12
3
1,5
6
10
I/Ie
1,5
4
4
1,5
I/Ie
1,1
I/Ie U/Ue
0,8
0,65
0,45
0,35
0,45
0,35
0,45
(1)
0,7
0,3
L/R (ms)
1
2,5
15
(1)
T0,95
6P (2)
1,05
1,05
1,05
1,05
1,05
1,05
1,05
1,05
1,1
1,1
Ur/Ue
1,05
1,05
1,05
1,05
Ur/Ue
1,1
1,5
4
8
8
10
10
3
1,5
6
10
Ic/Ie
1,5
4
4
1,5
Ic/Ie
1,1
Ic/Ie Ur/Ue
Normal operating
Closed
0,95
0,65
0,65
0,35
0,65
0,35
0,45
(1)
0,3
0,3
cos
1
2
7,5
(1)
cos
6P (2)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
U/Ue
1
1
1
1
U/Ue
1
1
2,5
6
6
6
6
2
1
6
10
I/Ie
1
2,5
2,5
1
I/Ie
1
I/Ie U/Ue
Contactor damages and effects of these damages :
There can be damages when the contactors are not used
according to technical datas and then failures begin to
occur at the feeding system.
Reasons of Probable Cancellation of Contactors :
Generally, contactors are the devices, which do not damage
easily. If the selection is made correctly and operating
conditions are not out of order, contactor can make millions
times opening and closing safely. The reasons of the
cancellation and their solutions are given below.
- Excessive length of cable of command circuit (coils) can
cause some problems. Voltage is low during the long cables
and this reason makes the closing difficultly and over big
cross-sectioned cable capacitance obstruct opening.
Generally advised cable cross-section and length are
mentioned in catalogues. If the command circuit is longer
than the advised value, higher contactor and more lower
coil voltage, resistance or inductive impedance connection
should be used.
- Dirt or foreign particles in the contactor, hard atmosphere
conditions and corrosion can obstruct the closing operation
of contactor. If we face a problem like this, contactor should
be cleaned, appropriately. Then the circuit should be checked
and modified for a more protective environmend for the
contactor. If there is a factor damaging the conduction, it
should be removed.
Changing the coil :
New coil is put on by pulling up screws, which are taking
place on both sides of the contactor, separating the upper
parts and taking the coil out off its socket. Much attention
should be paid to placing on its spring that at the bottom
side, during re-assembling.
Contact melting loss of obvious switch device is generally
related to opening current and contact lives which are shown
in diagrams. (Page 6) Using fields of contactors operating
the motors. Different operating types of motors are classified
according to IEC 60947-4-1 standard.
Contact life related to operating current :
- Events that can cause the contactors noisy operation is
dust and having foreign particles in the air space etc,
unsuitable voltage and frequency. Also defect of the nucleus
surface because of long time operation.
To obstruct all these, we should provide the clearness of
the nucleus face and (if needed) coil changing should be
made for voltage and frequency.
for all of values
for all of values
Ie<100A
Ie100A
Ie<100A
Ie100A
for all of values
for all of values
for all of values
for all of values
Ie
for all of values
for all of values
for all of values
for all of values
Ie
for all of values
= Before closed voltage
= Rated operating voltage
= Input point voltage after opening
U
Ue
Ur
I
Ie
Ic
= Closed current
= Rated operating current
= Opening current
cos cos cos cos
UTILIZATION CATEGORIES for CONTACTORS UTILIZATION CATEGORIES for CONTACTORS
CONTACTORS DAMAGES AND REPAIRS CONTACTORS DAMAGES AND REPAIRS
UNDERLOAD AVERAGE MOTOR CURRENTS
-2006
10/9
UNDERLOAD AVERAGE MOTOR CURRENTS
R N
Monophase motors
Three phase motors
Single Phase Motors Three Phase Motors With 4 Pole 50/ 60 Hz.
R T S N
1,8
2,75
3,5
4,4
6,1
8,7
11,5
13,5
14,5
20
27
32
35
39
52
64
75
85
103
113
126
134
150
170
182
195
203
240
260
295
325
356
420
425
450
472
483
520
578
595
626
700
800
826
900
948
980
990
1100
1150
1180
1250
kW HP 240 V
A
kW HP 220-240 V
A
380 V
A
415 V
A
440 V
A
500 V
A
660 V
A
1000 V
A
220 V
A
0,37
0,55
0,75
1,1
1,5
1,8
2,2
3
4
4,4
5,2
5,5
6
7
7,5
0,5
0,75
1
1,5
2
2,5
3
4
5
6
7
7,5
8
9
10
3,9
5,2
6,6
9,6
12,7
15,7
18,6
24,3
29,6
34,7
39,8
42,2
44,5
49,5
54,4
3,6
4,8
6,1
8,8
11,7
14,4
17,1
22,2
27,1
31,8
36,5
38,7
40,8
45,4
50
0,37
0,55
0,75
1,1
1,5
2,2
3
3,7
4
5,5
7,5
9
10
11
15
18,5
22
25
30
33
37
40
45
51
55
59
63
75
80
90
100
110
129
132
140
147
150
160
180
185
200
220
250
257
280
295
300
315
335
355
375
400
425
445
450
175
500
0,5
0,75
1
1,5
2
3
4
5
5,5
7,5
10
12
13,5
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
54
60
70
75
80
85
100
110
125
136
150
175
180
190
200
205
220
245
250
270
300
340
350
380
400
410
430
450
480
500
545
580
600
610
645
680
1,03
1,6
2
2,6
3,5
5
6,6
7,7
8,5
11,5
15,5
18,5
20
22
30
37
44
52
60
68
72
79
85
98
105
112
117
138
147
170
188
205
242
245
260
273
280
300
333
342
370
408
460
475
510
546
565
584
620
636
670
710
760
790
800
850
900
2
2,5
3,5
5
6,5
7,5
8,4
11
14
17
21
28
35
40
47
55
60
66
71
80
90
100
105
115
135
138
165
182
200
230
240
250
260
270
280
320
325
340
385
425
450
475
500
510
535
550
580
610
650
690
730
740
780
820
0,99
1,36
1,68
2,37
3,06
4,42
5,77
7,1
7,9
10,4
13,7
16,9
20,1
26,5
32,8
39
45,3
51,5
58
64
67
76
83
90
97
109
125
131
146
162
178
209
215
227
236
246
256
289
295
321
353
401
412
450
473
481
505
518
549
575
611
650
680
690
730
780
1
1,21
1,5
2
2,6
3,8
5
5,9
6,5
9
12
13,9
15
18,4
23
28,5
33
39,4
45
50
55
60
65
75
80
85
89
105
112
129
143
156
184
187
200
207
210
220
254
263
281
310
360
365
400
416
420
445
472
500
527
540
574
595
608
645
680
0,6
0,9
1,1
1,5
2
2,8
3,8
4,4
4,9
6,6
8,9
10,6
11,5
14
17,3
21,3
25,4
30,3
34,6
39
42
44
49
57
61
66
69
82
86
98
107
118
135
140
145
152
159
170
190
200
215
235
274
280
305
320
325
337
355
370
395
410
445
455
460
485
515
0,4
0,6
0,75
1
1,3
1,9
2,5
3
3,3
4,5
6
7
7,5
9
12
14,5
17
20
23
25
28
30
33
38
40
43
45
53
57
65
71
78
85
90
95
100
102
115
135
138
150
160
200
203
220
227
230
239
250
262
273
288
302
317
320
335
350
10 10
Fig-3 FC-40DK; FC-65DK; FC-95DK
(R)
L1 L2 L3
T1 T2 T3
A1
A2
Resistance (R)
33
34
13
14
21
22
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
-2006
10/10
That is why capacitor switching contactors are used and
for this reason the life-time of contactors increase 100%
in comparision with normal contactor.
Example: If electrical life of normal contactor is 100.000 in
max load, electrical life of capacitor switching contactor is
200.000.
When coil of contactor is energized, first contact of passing
block is closed, starting current of contactor is passed
through this contact, approximately after 3 - 5 ms contacts
of passing blocks are opened and rated current of contactor
is carried on main contacts.
Special contactors for switching capacitor :
FC-.. DK series contactors are designed only for capacitor
switching. They can be used safely in single step or multiple-
step capacitor banks because of their special design.FC-
DK series contactors have current limiting contact blocks,
so the starting current of capacitor is limited with 80xIn. So
the life time of both capacitor and circuit protection devices
will increase.
Circuit diagram
Why capacitor switching contactor ?
As it is known, when the capacitor starts to operate, they
cause a high frequency between 1-15 kHz. and a current
that is 180 time higher than rated current for very short time
period. Shock inductance is to be fixed to each phase to
limit this current. But practically this type of operation is
difficult.
29
50
10
10
20
690
8
200.000
1NO+1NC
0,60
FC - 32DK
23
40
10
7
15
690
8
200.000
1NO+1NC
0,58
FC - 25DK FC - 65DK
43
80
25
15
30
690
8
200.000
2NO+1NC
1,36
72
125
50
30
50
690
8
200.000
2NO+1NC
1,58
FC - 95DK
Contactor for
capacitor switching
IEC 60947-4-1
EN 60947-4-1
Contactor type
Rated insulation voltage-Ui (a.c.) 50-60 Hz
Electrical life (ON-OFF)
Auxiliary contact number
Weight
max
Rated capacitor
power (kVAr)
Q 40C
Utilization Category AC-6b
Iemax Ue 415 V
Rated thermal current (Ith)
A
A
mm
2
220/240 V
380/415 V
V
kV
kg
101
200
95
40
70
690
8
200.000
1NO+1NC
2,65
FC - 150DK
CONTACTOR for CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTOR for CAPACITOR SWITCHING
Fig-2 FC-12DK; FC-18DK; FC-25DK; FC-32DK
(R)
L1 L2 L3
T1 T2 T3
A1
A2
Resistance (R)
33
34
21
22
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
FC - 40DK
36
60
25
13
25
690
8
200.000
2NO+1NC
1,34
8
25
4
3
5
690
8
200.000
1NO+1NC
0,39
FC12DK
15
32
6
6
10
690
8
200.000
1NO+1NC
0,40
FC18DK
ORDER CODES of CONTACTORS
50/60 Hz
24 V
A5
42 V
B5
440 V
V5
48 V
E5
110 V
H5
220 V
K5
380 V
S5
240 V
R5
415 V
T5
-2006
10/11
ORDER CODES of CONTACTORS
Coil voltages : Coil voltages of contactors are shown in table below.
Example1: For 220 V, 50/60 Hz coil voltage. K5
Example2: For AC3 class 32 A, normally closed, coil voltage 48 V 50/60 Hz. contactors: FC - 32DO1 E5.
Example3: For AC3 class 95 A, normally 3 closed and 1 opening with auxiliary contact, coil voltage 220 V and 50/60 Hz.
FC - 95D11K5 + FCB-F02
(1) First number shows normally opening contact (NO), second number
shows normally closed contact (NC).
Example;
11 = 1 NO + 1 NC
(2) M : Mini contactor
D : Standard contactor
K : Capacitor switching contactor
Definitions of contactor type code :
Coil voltage value
Number of auxiliary contact (1)
Contactor type (2)
Rated current (AC3)
Federal contactor
Order codes of contactors : Auxiliary contact blocks order code:
FC09 D
FC12 D
FC18 D
FC25 D
FC32 D
FC40 D
FC50 D
FC65 D
FC80 D
FC95 D
FC115 D
FC150 D
FC200 D
FC260 D
FC300 D
8DD-0000-0009
8DD-0000-0012
8DD-0000-0018
8DD-0000-0025
8DD-0000-0032
8DD-0000-0040
8DD-0000-0050
8DD-0000-0065
8DD-0000-0080
8DD-0000-0095
8DD-0000-0115
8DD-0000-0150
8DD-0000-0200
8DD-0000-0260
8DD-0000-0300
FCB-F20
FCB-F11
FCB-F02
FCB-F40
FCB-F31
FCB-F22
FCB-F13
FCB-F04
8DD-A0020-0000
8DD-A0011-0000
8DD-A0002-0000
8DD-A0040-0000
8DD-A0031-0000
8DD-A0022-0000
8DD-A0013-0000
8DD-A0004-0000
Upper Mounting
Type
Order Code
Type Order Code
Spare main contact set order code :
FCC-D2
FCC-D4
FCC-D6
FCC-D8
FCC-D10
8DD-C20-0000
8DD-C30-0000
8DD-C40-0000
8DD-C50-0000
8DD-C60-0000
Type Order Code
Spare coil order code :
Coil operating voltage.
FCAB-F11
FCAB-F20
FCAB-F02
8DD-B0011-0000
8DD-B0020-0000
8DD-B0002-0000
Side Mounting
Type
Order Code
Coil operating voltage.
AC-3 Ie (A)
FC06M
FC09M
FC09D
FC12D
FC18D
FC25D
FC32D
FC40D
FC50D
FC65D
FC80D
FC95D
6
9
9
12
18
25
32
40
50
65
80
95
2.2
4
4
5,5
7,5
11
15
18,5
22
30
37
45
kW 400 V Standard Auxiliary Contact
1 NA
1 NK
1 NA
1 NK
1 NA
1 NK
1 NA
1 NK
1 NA
1 NK
1 NA
1 NK
1 NA
1 NK
1 NA + 1 NK
1 NA + 1 NK
1 NA + 1 NK
1 NA + 1 NK
1 NA + 1 NK
Order Code
9DM- 103-0009
9DM- 013-0009
9DM- 103-0009
9DM- 013-0009
9DD - 103-0009
9DD - 013-0009
9DD - 103-0012
9DD - 013-0012
9DD - 103-0018
9DD - 013-0018
9DD - 103-0025
9DD - 013-0025
9DD - 103-0032
9DD - 013-0032
9DD - 113-0040
9DD - 113-0050
9DD - 113-0065
9DD - 113-0080
9DD - 113-0095
9DD - 003-0115
9DD - 003-0150
9DD - 003-0220
9DD - 003-0260
9DD - 003-0300
Type
FC115D
FC150D
FC220D
FC260D
FC300D
115
150
220
260
300
55
75
110
140
160
-
-
-
-
-
FC06M22* 6 2.2 2 NA + 2 NK 9DM -K3 223-0006
FC - 50 D 11 K5
FC09D...FC32D
FC40D...FC95D
9MK-0001
9MK-0002
Type Order Code
Mechanical Lock Order Code :
Compensation Block
Compensation Resistance Blok
8DK-D21-0
8DK-D21-1
Type Order Code
Contactor for Capacitor Switching Accesorries Order Code :
Contactor Type.
Contactor for capacitor switching order code :
AC-6b Ie (A)
FC12DK
FC18DK
FC25DK
FC32DK
FC40DK
FC65DK
FC95DK
FC-150DK
8
15
23
29
36
49
72
101
5
10
15
20
25
30
50
70
kVAr 400 V Standard auxiliary contact
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
2 NO + 1 NC
2 NO + 1 NC
2 NO + 1 NC
1 NO
1 NC
Order code
9DK- 113-0012
9DK- 113-0018
9DK- 113-0025
9DK- 113-0032
9DK- 213-0065
9DK- 213-0095
9DK- 103-0150
9DK- 013-0150
Type
10 10
DIMENSIONS of RELEVANT CONTACTORS DIMENSIONS of RELEVANT CONTACTORS
-2006
10/12
4
8
.
5
34.5
b
c
a
4
2
.
5
40
b
4
8
.
5
a
c
a
c
b
1
0
5
.
5
30
40
c
a
75
b
c
1
3
1
FC150DK Type :
230-250
1
2
2
75
90
75
FC40DK/FC65DK/FC95DK Type :
72,5
200-210
1
5
0
75
40
FC25DK / FC32DK Type :
57
40
140-150
1
3
1
-
1
3
6
35
FC12DK / FC18DK Type :
46
34.5
130-140
1
1
7
-
1
2
2
35
Type
FC 09D
FC12D
FC18D
a
80
80
85
b
46
46
46
c
74.5
74.5
74.5
Type
FC25D
FC32D
a
94
94
b
57
57
c
84
84
Type
FC40D
FC50D
FC65D
FC80D
FC95D
a
115
115
115
122
122
b
75
75
75
75
75
c
125.5
125.5
125.5
125.5
125.5
Type
FC115D
FC150D
a
143
143
b
90
90
c
150
150
1
9
7
.
5
44 a
c
b
c
Type
FC220D
FC260D
FC300D
a b c
177
177
177
140
140
140
235
235
235
Operating Voltage Un
Peak Voltage
Rated current
Peak current (t=10msn)
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Reaction period max (ms)
Control Voltage
Control current
Rated capacitor power
Order code.
400
1200
15
320
-5 ... + 55
-40 ...+100
10
220 V AC, 12- 24 V DC-AC
22
10
9DK-A0003-0015
400
1200
30
450
-5 ... + 55
-40 ...+100
10
220 V AC, 12- 24 V DC-AC
22
20
9DK-A0003-0015
FSC15K FSC30K
V
V
A
A
C
C
ms
mA
kVAr
The Current impacts are seen on picture 3 are parasites which
are occurred by another capacitor switch on the circuit. This
parasite is an avoidable. Because, a harmonic current which
occurs when other capacitor switch on is flowed to parallel
capacitor. As an over current is not flowed on capacitor during
switch on capacitor in compensation system by semiconductor
contactor, parasites do not occurred on parallel capacitor.
Power electronic components find more using area instead
of mechanical contactor for switch on and off electrical load
with technology. Switching can be made fastly by semiconductor
contactor. In this way, switch on and off stage is obtained in
one period. High power loads as spot welding machine,
harbour crane, welding machine, elevator, drill, arc furnaces
, impact load, induction furnaces e.t.c are compensated fastly
especially for automotive, paper, package, food textile, glass
and cement sectors.
Current and voltage capacity of power electronic switch
components will increase and their price will be cheap with
developing of technology. As it is explained below,
semiconductor switching has important advantages instead
of mechanic switching.
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT SEMICONDUCTOR CONTACTOR GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT SEMICONDUCTOR CONTACTOR
General :
Fig-1 At the time of switch on compensation capacitor by contactor
for capacitor switching.
I
t
Fig-3 The current flows on compensation capacitor which switches
by contactor for capacitor switching is seen.
I
t
Fig-2 Figure of voltage and current wave on capacitor during the
switch on the same capacitor by semiconductor contactor,
I
t
As it is seen on figure 2, over current does not occur for
switching by semiconductor contactor.
Advantages of Semiconductor Switching.
As it is seen on figure 1.at the time of switch on, peak value
of high current which flows by capacitor is about five times
from peak value of nominal current.
-2006
10/13
10 10
- Long-life
- High reliable.
- No corrosion.
- No moving part.
- No electronic interference.
- High switching speed.
- High input and output isolation.
- Durable for shock and vibration
- Switching at phase angle is zero.
- No arc during the switching.
- No inductance at the control side.
- Temporary impulse, peak, flash over at the electronic devices
connected the same system.
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT SEMICONDUCTOR CONTACTOR GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT SEMICONDUCTOR CONTACTOR
GENERAL INFORMATION AND DIMENSIONS OF SEMICONDUCTOR CONTACTORS GENERAL INFORMATION AND DIMENSIONS OF SEMICONDUCTOR CONTACTORS
FCT15K-FCT30K Type:
1
0
0
9
2
,
4
9
0
7
0
,
8
70
55,6
20 20
12,6 79,6 51,7
65
8
,
6
1
3
5
,
2
1
4
3
,
9
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
At figure 5.current wave figure is shown at the time of switch
the capacitor by semiconductor contactor. As it is seen, any
over current occurred at the time of switch on. Approximately
during the 3 periods time is a temporary state which is occurred
for harmonic filter of the circuit. As any over current does not
pass on the capacitor like switch on capacitor the circuit, any
parasites occurred on parallel capacitor.
Not : Using of current limited reactor on harmonic filter reactor
or nonfilter compensation system ; NH super flink fuse must
be used for protection.
L1
L2
L3
Fig-6 Connection diagram for one level on compensation system
with semiconductor contactor.
Fig-4
I
t
Fig-5
I
t
During the capacitor switch on by semiconductor contactor
a current wave figure is seen at figure 4.The reason of repeated
one after the other current impact as occurred parasite is
contactor contacts are stick each other. Current impact is 10
times to nominal current as it is seen at the figure.
-2006
10/14
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT AC - DC HIGH CURRENT CONTACTORS
-2006
10/15
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT AC - DC HIGH CURRENT CONTACTORS
General :
Federal high current contactors are used safe and reliable
in resistive, inductive and capacitive AC circuits. It is
manufactured in conformity with VDE 0660 standard.
Normally contactors have three poles. On request they can
be produced with 1, 2 or 4 poles.
Federal contactors are designed for AC application only.
Selection of contactors is shown in technical value table for
various usage class and voltage.
Beginning button is fixed to AC circuit. This connection is
shown on the connection diagram. Contactor is not opened
in the event of voltage harmonic in circuit. For example,
voltage should be below 55 V (0.25xUs) for opening
contactor, in the event of control feeding voltage (Us)
220 V. in circuit max 4A (In=1600) current is pulled by
contactor in the entering of circuit. Current is 180 mA
(In=1600A) while contactor in circuit. As it is understood
from this, power consumption of Federal contactor is very
small. And operating noise of coil is very low.Coil and
operating systems are capable to operate in dusty industrial
envi ronment s. They are sui t abl y rust proof ed.
Coil circuit :
Contact System :
Arc and main contacts are existing in main circuit of contactor.
Previously arc contact is closed at position of closing and
this contact takes instantaneous starting currents which
could occur on the rated current. After that it is provided
completely touching by closing contacts. Wearing due to
arc will be occur and strike of main contacts to each other
is prevented by means of this closed system. In the position
of opening while voltage of coil is interrupted, previously
main contact will not be damaged in the event of arc.
Auxiliary Contacts :
There are 4 opening and 4 closed auxiliary contacts on the
contactor. 2 opening and 2 closed contacts of them are
used in coil circuit. Other 2 opening and 2 closed contacts
are kept as spare. Depending on request 2 opening and 2
closed contacts can be provided.
By means of electromagnetic blow in contactor, arc which
occurs during the opening is pushed into the arc extinguisher
and extinguishing of arc is provided by arc divider in
extinguisher by dividing the arcs. Due to this reason
contactors should never be operated without installation of
arc extinguisher .
Arc extinguishers :
Advantages:
- Due to twin contact technique, main contacts are saved
from spark errosion during open as well as closing operation
and can have long operating life.
- High current contactors can be used under the hard
conditions with safety, by means of wide arc extinguisher,
magnetic blow and special contact system in comparison
of compact contactors.
- Heating of core is prevented at the high frequency so that
they can be used as a convenient at induction furnace due
to this characteristic.
- There is no noise while in operation.
- Consumption of power is very small. (Consumption of
power is shown at table of technical characteristics)
- High current contactors are not effected from harmonic
voltage.
- Auxiliary contacts are existing. (Depending on request
number of auxi l i ary contact can be i ncreased)
- Depending on request, mechanical locking can be installed
as a addition to electrical locking.
- Together with these advantages, these products are also
economic.
660 V 3 ~ 220 V
440 V 660 V
R S T N P(N) N(P)
P(N) N(P) P(N) N(P)
Fig-7
Figure of connection at AC-DC circuit :
Figure of connection of contactors below is shown for AC
voltage. Continuously the energy must be gone from upper
terminal in which the extinguishers exist to contactor in order
to push the blowing of electromagnetic in to arc extinguishers.
10 10
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS of AC/DC HIGH CURRENT CONTACTORS
NO (10A)
NC (10A)
Pulling
Holding
Depth
Wideness
Height
High Current Contactor
IEC 60947- 4
Type
Utilization category
Ie max
Number poles
For capacitor switching circuit
For squirrel-cage
asynchronous
motors
3 ~ AC3
Auxiliary contacts
Coil power
consumption
Mechanical life
Dimensions
Weight
220 / 230 V
380 / 400 V
500 V
380 / 400 V
Ui
Us (AC)
Us (DC)
xUs
AC1 (Ith)
40C
A
quantity
mm
2
kW
kW
kW
kVAr
~ V
~ V
V
~ V
Pcs
Pcs
W
W
Operation
mm
mm
mm
kg
300
1,2,3,4
40 x 5
75
132
180
150
690
24, 48, 110, 220, 240, 380, 415
24, 48, 110, 220, 240, 380, 415
0,72 - 1,1
2
2
800
26
50000
245
462
370
28,6
EC 300
1250
1,2,3,4
2(40 x 10)
370
630
740
450
690
2
2
880
35
50000
245
557
370
44,2
EC 1250
1600
1,2,3,4
80 x 15
470
790
960
525
690
2
2
880
35
50000
245
557
370
44,8
EC 1600
800
1,2,3,4
40 x 12
200
335
450
300
690
2
2
800
26
50000
245
462
370
30,4
EC 800
400
1,2,3,4
40 x 5
110
200
257
200
690
2
2
800
26
50000
245
462
370
29,2
EC 400
630
1,2,3,4
40 x 8
160
280
355
250
690
2
2
800
26
50000
245
462
370
29,8
EC 630
2000
1,2,3
2(80 x 10)
580
980
1190
655
690
4
4
1760
70
50000
500
710
370
88,4
EC 2000 EC 2500
Coil voltage operating range
Control feeding
voltage
2500
1,2,3
2(80 x 15)
730
1230
1490
820
690
4
4
1760
70
50000
500
710
370
89,6
-2006
10/16
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS of AC/DC HIGH CURRENT CONTACTORS
Contactors Order Codes :
AC-3 Ie (A)
EC 300
EC 400
EC 630
EC 800
EC 1250
EC 1600
EC 2000
EC 2500
300
400
630
800
1250
1600
2000
2500
132
200
280
325
630
790
980
1230
kW 400 V Standard auxiliary contact
2 NO + 2 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
4 NO + 4 NC
4 NO + 4 NC
Order code Type
Us: Control feeding voltage
Note: High current contactors are manufactured standard as a three poles.
: Coil operating voltage. : Number of poles. (1, 2, 3, 4)
9DY- 22 -0300
9DY- 22 -0400
9DY- 22 -0630
9DY- 22 -0800
9DY- 22 -1250
9DY- 22 -1600
9DY- 22 -2000
9DY- 22 -2500
50/60 Hz
DC
24 V
A5
A6
48 V
E5
E6
110 V
H5
H6
220 V
K5
K6
380 V
S5
S6
415 V
T5
T6
240 V
R5
R6
max
AC/DC CONNECTION DIAGRAMS of HIGH CURRENT CONTACTORS
-2006
10/17
AC/DC CONNECTION DIAGRAMS of HIGH CURRENT CONTACTORS
e01 : 6A fuse
e02 : 5A fuse
e2 : Thermal relay contact Users connection (Stop mechanism)
R : Resistance dividing voltage (2200 - 75 W)
BD : Bridge diot
K : Coil
Connection diagram :
- : Sequence terminals R1=(2200%5) -75W for - VRN=220 V
- Put the stop button on DC circuit as like the diagram otherwise there will be a delay at opening.
- No.5 and 6 terminals are short-circuited for testing. Users should pay much attention to this item and should make the connection according to diagram.
Connection diagram of mechanical
locking :
6
6
0
Pic-2
Pic-1
3
K
K
4
K
K
R
5A
5
1
N
2
6
On
Off
K
R
43
44
84
83
3
4
71
72
32
31
BD
e02
95
96
1
2
e2
e01
Auxiliary contact block connection diagram
e02 3
5
1
12
11 23 31
24 32
43
44
51
52
63
64
71
72
83
84
4 R
K
123456
e2
Neutral Phase
ON
OFF
4
3
95
96
2
1
10 10
DIMENSIONS of AC/DC HIGH CURRENT CONTACTORS
-2006
10/18
DIMENSIONS of AC/DC HIGH CURRENT CONTACTORS
EC1250 - EC1600 Type :
Energy input
12.5
14
44
550
14
1
4
5
Assembly
hole
Assembly
hole
86 25
12.5
308
Separators
15
EC2000 - EC2500 Type :
Energy input
12.5
14
44
550
14
1
4
5
Assembly
hole
Assembly
hole
86 25
12.5
308
Separators
642
1
3
0
2
5
Assembly
plate
15
Separators
Energy input
12.5
14
65
170
14
1
4
5
Assembly
hole
Assembly
hole
40 25
435
12.5
EC300-EC400-EC630-EC800 Type :
100 mm.(min)
1
3
8
3
7
0
245
15
100 mm.(min)
500
3
7
0
100 mm.(min)
1
8
0
CONTENTS
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
-2006
General and Technical Information of Thermal Overload Relays
Technical Information and Order Codes of Thermal Overload Relays
Dimensions of Thermal Overload Relays
2
3
4
11/1
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
FTR25 FTR32
CONTENTS
Thermal Overload Relays Thermal Overload Relays
11 11
GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
So, the limited opening current is Ia = (1,05-1,2 ) Ie. Besides
of that, the hot relay should open within 2 min. at 1,5 Ie. And
the cold relay should open in 2 sec. or 5 sec. depended on
delay time at 7,2 Ie.
The average value of opening characteristic of heated relay by
adjustment current is 10%-30% of cold relay. The values depend
on intensity of limited current is 1,05-1,2 times of adjustment
current.
The opening time of the hot relay decreases from 5 min. to 2 min.
at the1,5 Ie as seen at fig. 1. The limited opening current values
related to the values of opening current of the thermal overload
relay are written according to IEC 60947-4-1.The cold thermal
overload relay shouldnt open within 2 hours at 20
o
C ambition
temperature and 1,05 Ie. And the hot condution should open
within 2 hours at 1,2 Ie.
General
Thermal Overload Relays connected with a contactor breaks
the circuit in order to isolate the motor in case of over load or
phase is cut out. The contactor with a thermal overload relay
becomes a much useful device. That protects the consumer
against the over current, also protects the contactor against
the effects of over heat. FEDERAL thermal overload relays are
manufactured according to IEC 60947-4-1 and CE standards
up to 32 A compensated at ambition temperature.
Each phase of thermal overload relay is related to over current
angle. Bimetals pushes the differential bar and opens the
circuit when it is heated. Only two bimetals operate when one
phase is cut out and the over current angle operates much
rapidly due to over current. The mechanism of the thermal
overload relay compensates changes of ambition temperature
and prevents the relay against effects of temperature changes.
The average value of opening characteristic of thermal over
current relay under hot condition operation is smaller than cold
condition. In other words, cold relay open later than hot relay
approximately ratio at the determined current. That is important
about safety for the relay and protected device. The relay
under hot condition and over loaded 1,5 times should break
circuit within 2 min. for motors according to IEC 60947-4-1.
d
s
Cold
Limit
Current
120
50
20
10
5
2
1
10
5
3
2
1
1 1,5 2 5 10
Hot
xIe
t
Fig.1 : Opening Closing Characteristics of thermal over
current relay under hot and cold condition operation.
-2006
11/2
Opening
Current
Delay Time
Operating
Condition
Description
1,05 Ie
1,20 Ie
1,50 Ie
7,2 Ie
> 2 hrs
< 2 hrs
< 2 min.
> 2 sec.
Cold
Hot
Hot
Cold
Limit Opening Current
Limit Opening Current
-
-
2
1
40
20
10
4
2
2
4
1
1
20
10
40
0.8
0.8 1 2 4 6 10 17 20
1
2
3
Time
d
s
h
Class 10 A
xIe
t
Fig.-2: The Current time curve of the thermal over current relay.
1. 3 phases balanced operation (cold)
2. 2 phases balanced operation (cold)
3. 3 phases balanced operation (hot)
Table 1. Thermal opening current and delay times of over
current relay loaded at 20
o
C as every equaled three current
way.
If 3 poles thermal overload relay loads as 2 poles, the opening
time will rise 10%, if it loads as 1 pole the time will rise 20%.
The limited current values and opening characteristic are
determined at 20
o
C ambition temperature. If the ambition
temperature changes, the opening time will change. As a result
of that, the limited current value decreases then the relay sends
command signal early. For example, the limited current at 50
o
C is lower than at 20%. But, as ambition temperature
decreases, so current temperature is needed, for the same
opening time at 20
o
C. If the relay and protected device such
as motor, operated at the same ambition temperature and if
their heat was equal under definited condition, the operating
characteristic of the relays depending on ambition temperature
would be advantage. But reality of these conditions is not
possible every time for especially remote control systems and
enclosed relays. But in this situation, the protected device and
relay may not operate at the same ambition temperature.
GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY and ORDER CODES
Auxiliary Contacts:
Opening contact, acts two contacts, one of them closes and
the other one breaks. Breaking contact breaks the energy by
cutting out the motor contactor. The closing contact can be
used for the different purpose.
Reset Button:
The reset button is used as automatic or manual. If it is automatic
( A ), the thermal relay will put into use the contactor after
bimetals getting cold by automatically. If it is manual ( M), you
should press to reset button after bimetal getting cold in order
to the contactor is put in to use.
-2006
11/3
Specifications
- 2 size from 0,1 A than 32 A
- 1 NO+1NC auxiliary contacts
- Easy assembly
- Bimetal opening mechanism
- Phase fault protection
- Indicator
- Adjustment of instant current
- Automatic or manual reset button
- Test and stop button
- The motor starts cannot effect it due to opening class
- Can be assembled on DIN rail.
Type
Current Adjustment
Opening
Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui)
Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage ( Uimp)
Max. Operation Altitude
Heating Compensation
Operation Frequency.
Auxiliary Contacts
1NO+1NC
(A)
Class (A)
(V)
kV
m
Hz
Ie 220V
AC15 380V
FTR25
0.1 ... 25
10
690
6
2000
-25...+55
50/60
2.73
1.58
FTR32
23 - 32
10
690
6
2000
-25...+55
50/60
2.73
1.58
Only being at same ambition temperature relay and motor is
not enough to safety protection. The opening limited heating
of relay should be equal to permitted heating of motor. Generally,
it is not possible to have both of these conditions at the same
time. So that, adjustment current of the relay should be adjusted
continuously, considering changing of temperature. Thermal
over current relays are connected with a heating compensation
because of the changing temperature. So, the limited opening
current is ( 1,05 1,2 ) Ie at ambition temperature between
-25 to +55 C. And the adjustment is not needed.
IEC 947-4-1
IEN 60947-4-1
CE
Motor consumes much current when one phase is cut out or
one fuse breaks, than normal operation. The phase fault
protection of the thermal relay is put into use and the contactor
is no longer to be in use in order to the motor not to burn.
1,5
1,4
1,3
1,2
1,1
1,0
0,9
-25 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 55
Closed
Open
Ambition temperature
Limited compensation values
x
I
e
Ambition temperature
Fig. 3: Heating Compensation.
Technical Specifications
FTR32
1.8-2.5
2.2-3.2
2.8-4
3.5-5
4.5-6.3
5.5-8
7-10
9-12.5
11-16
14-20
17-22
20-25
23-32
Order Code
gG
6
10
10
16
16
20
20
25
35
50
50
63
63
Short Circuit
Protection
Contactor
Type
FTR25
Type
9DD-T0001-0025
9DD-T0001-0032
9DD-T0001-0040
9DD-T0001-0050
9DD-T0001-0063
9DD-T0001-0080
9DD-T0001-0100
9DD-T0001-0125
9DD-T0001-0160
9DD-T0001-0200
9DD-T0001-0220
9DD-T0001-0250
9DD-T0002-3200
aM
4
6
6
8
8
12
12
16
20
25
25
30
40
Order Codes
Test Button
The motor contactor can be tested whether it is in use or not
by pressing the test button.
Stop Button
The stop button can be used for operation motor contactor if
there is an emergency situation.
GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY and ORDER CODES
Current
A
Current adjustment
1NO auxiliary contact
Contactor
1 NC auxiliary contact
Pic.-1
Test button
Reset button
Limited opening currents
FC09D ... FC32D
FC09D ... FC32D
FC09D ... FC32D
FC09D ... FC32D
FC09D ... FC32D
FC09D ... FC32D
FC09D ... FC32D
FC09D ... FC32D
FC09D ... FC32D
FC09D ... FC32D
FC09D ... FC32D
FC09D ... FC32D
FC25D ... FC32D
11 11
DIMENSIONS of THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
-2006
11/4
DIMENSIONS of THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
FTR32 :
9
3
6
9
63
7
0
56
FTR25 :
6
4
7
9
5
6
.
5
60
45
12 12
MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH
General and Technical Information About Motor Protection Switches
Selection of Motor Protection Circuit Breakers
Technical Characteristic of Motor Protection Switches
Accessories of Motor Protection Switches
Dimensions of Motor Protection Switches
FMK
12/1
MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH
2
2
3
3
4
-2006
Motor Protection Switch Motor Protection Switch
CONTENTS CONTENTS
12/2
General :
-2006
FEDERAL FMK 25 type motor protection circuit breakers
with thermal and magnetic short-circuit release are designed
mai nl y to protect three-phase i nducti on motors.
Advantages of FMK 25.
- Compliance with EN 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-4-1, VDE 0660
and CE certificate.
- Reliable protection in case of overloads and short circuits.
Selection Of Motor Protection Circuit Breakers
Technical Data :
Fig-1 Time-current curve (For 20 C)
(Current as a multiplier of the set current)
- Simple and fast mounting by snap fitting on 35 mm wide
mounting rail; fixing with two screws is also possible if a
special adapter is used.
- It is convenient to mount into a distribution box.
- Numerous accessories make the application field wider
and enable all demands of users.
Standard motor powers
kW
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.005
0.002
0.001
1 2 4 6 8 10 20 50 100
xI
e
O
p
e
n
i
n
g

t
i
m
e

(
s
e
c
.
)
Single-phase
220 V
230 V
240 V
0,06...0,09
0,12
0,18...0,25
0,37
0,55...0,75
1,1...1,5
2,2
3
3 Phase
220 V
230 V
240 V
0,06
0,09
0,09...0,12
0,18...0,25
0,37
0,55...0,8
1,1...1,5
1,5...2,5
3...4
5,5
5,5...7,5
0,02
0,06
0,09
0,12
0,18...0,25
0,37...0,55
0,75...1,1
1,1...1,5
2,2...2,5
3...4
5...7,5
9
11...12,5
380 V
400 V
415 V
500 V
0,06
0,12
0,25
0,37
0,55...0,8
1,1
1,5...2,2
3
4...5,5
7,5...9
11...12,5
15
600 V
690 V
0,06
0,09
0,18
0,25
0,37...0,55
0,75...1,1
1,5
2,2...3
4
5,5...7,5
11
15
18,5
A
Setting ranges
of thermal
overload release
0,1...0,16
0,16...0,25
0,25...0,4
0,4...0,63
0,63...1
1...1,6
1,6...2,5
2,5...4
4..6,3
6,3...10
10...16
16...20
20...25
EN 60947-4-1,IEC 60947-4-1
VDE 0660, CE
100000 operation
-25...+50 C
-25...+40 C
250 g
IP 20
IP 55
690 V
6 kV
25 A
100000 operation
690 V
0,75...4 mm
2
500 V
6 A
3,5
2
1,5
6 A (gL, gG)
0,75...2,5 mm
2
General
Standards
Mechanical life
Ambient
temperature
Weight (~)
Protection
class
Main circuits
Rated insulation voltage Ui
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
Thermal current Ithmax = Iemax
Electrical life (AC 3 and le)
Utilization category : AC 3
Terminal capacity
Auxiliary switch PS
Rated insulation voltage Ui
Thermal current Ith
Rated operational current Ie
at utilization category
AC 15
Short-circuit protection - max
Terminal capacity (1 or 2 conductors)
No box
In box
No box
In box
230 V
400 V
500 V
GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES
12 12
12/3
-2006
Note : Our products are being calibrated to 40 C. On request of customer, this value can be changed.
Connection Diagram
Accessories
Accessory name : Auxiliary switch
Weight : 35 g
Accessory name : Under-voltage release
Weight : 65 g
Accessory name : Shunt release
Weight : 65 g
Accessory name : Emergency stop push-button
Weight : 35 g
Type : FMK NAT
Order code : 8LA-D0000-0000
Accessory name : Enclosure
Weight : 240 g
Type : FMK 55 ENC
Protection degree : IP 55
Order code : 8LA-E0000-0000
Contact position
2NO
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
Tip
FMK F-20
FMK F-10
FMK F-01
FMK F-11
Order Code
8LA-A0020-0000
8LA-A0010-0000
8LA-A0001-0000
8LA-A0011-0000
Type
FMK DGB-24
FMK DGB-48
FMK DGB-110
FMK DGB-220
FMK DGB-240
FMK DGB-380
FMK DGB-415
Operating Voltage (50 Hz)
24 V
48 V
110 V
220 V
240 V
380 V
415 V
Order Code
8LA-B0000-0024
8LA-B0000-0048
8LA-B0000-0110
8LA-B0000-0220
8LA-B0000-0240
8LA-B0000-0380
8LA-B0000-0415
Type
FMK A-24
FMK A-110
FMK A-220
FMK A-240
Operating Voltage (50 Hz)
24 V
110 V
220 V
240 V
Order Code
8LA-C0000-0024
8LA-C0000-0110
8LA-C0000-0220
8LA-C0000-0240
Type
FMK 25-0,16
FMK 25-0,25
FMK 25-0,4
FMK 25-0,63
FMK 25-1
FMK 25-1,6
FMK 25-2,5
FMK 25-4
FMK 25-6,3
FMK 25-10
FMK 25-16
FMK 25-20
FMK 25-25
Current
setting
range
(A)
0,1...0,16
0,16...0,25
0,25...0,4
0,4...0,63
0,63...1
1...1,6
1,6...2,5
2,5...4
4...6,3
6,3...10
10...16
16...20
20...25
9LA-00000-0016
9LA-00000-0025
9LA-00000-0040
9LA-00000-0063
9LA-00000-0100
9LA-00000-0160
9LA-00000-0250
9LA-00000-0400
9LA-00000-0630
9LA-00000-1000
9LA-00000-1600
9LA-00000-2000
9LA-00000-2500
Order Code
Mag.
trip
cur.
(A)
1,9
2,6
4,4
8
11
19
30
42
69
110
210
220
330
Short-circuit breaking
capacity Icu = Ics =Iq (kA)
220-
240 V
380-
415 V
500 V 660-
690 V
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
6
6
6
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
6
4
4
4
100
100
100
100
100
100
3
3
3
3
2,5
2,5
2,5
100
100
100
100
100
100
2,5
2,5
2,5
2,5
2
2
2
Max. front protection fuse
gL, gG (A) (for I>Icu)
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
25
35
50
50
63
63
63
20
25
35
35
35
50
50
1 3 5
2 4 6
2 Poles
1 3 5
2 4 6
3 Poles
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 Poles
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS of MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS of MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES
-2006
12/4
Motor protection switch :
Auxiliary switch :
Enclosure :
Emergency stop push-button :
45
8
0
4 38
73.5
83
4
5
41.5
26.5
8
0
77
4
5
9
41.5
2
4
66
3
0
1
5
2
5
R99
3
1
71.5
30
7
.
5
3
4
30
4
8
1
5
16
5
8
5
4
Installation screw dia M4
1
3
5
80
95.5
60
55
5
2
.
5
1
6
39
1
8
.
5
DIMENSIONS of MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES DIMENSIONS of MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES
13 13
Phase Protection and Time Relays
Counter and Thermostat
RELAYS
-2006
Motor Protection, Phase Sequence and Liquid Level Relay
Motor Phase Protection Relay
Phase Sequency and Motor Protection Relay
Time Relays
FT 60 Time Relay Operating Ways
Counters
Thermostats
Dimensions of Relays
2
2
3
3
4
5
5
6
13/1
RELAYS
Phase Protection and Time Relays
Counter and Thermostat
FMFS MTPR1 FSMK FT-30 FT-60
FDT72 FDT96 FS72
CONTENTS CONTENTS
All phases of voltage measures as notr. During this time, if it
notices more than any turned to arranging value at the end of
the time over, than it switch of the exit relay.
It protectived the motor, phase breaking is decreasing drop in
voltage and assist the voltage cases.
-2006
13/2
FMFS control relay which manufactured as plenty functions
provided below mentioned functions.
General :
1. Voltage imbalance, breaking the phase :
Relay controls the phase sequence. If it perceives any mistake,
it switches off the exit relay. It protectives the system against
to the phase sequences.
2. Phases sequence control :
3. Liquid level control :
Pic-1
FMFS motor protection, phase sequence and liquid level relay
Protection for the failure of motors which are created by the
phase protection function that mentioned as below.
General : Technical Characteristics :
The motor will be switched off if it is senses 2 or 1 phase for
any reason.
1. Phase breaking :
Notr phase voltage unbalanced % 20 (depended by % 40) if
it is over the lever that the motor take out the circuit.
2. Unbalanced voltage :
Correct Connection :
Pic-2
MTPR1 Motor phase protection relay
Technical Characteristics :
Operating voltage : 380 V AC 50 HZ
Relay contacts : 1 NO , 1 NC
Contact power : 250 V / 5A AC
Warning : Normally burning, extinguishing,
led, during the failure
Assembling shape : Perpendicular in the panel or to do
terminal ray.
Working temperature : - 10C/+ 60C
Delaying time : 0 5 sn.
Unbalanced voltage : Adjustable (max. % 20)
Order code : 9 HC. A0000 0000
Fig-1
SSR+
Min
Max
K1
0
I
Max Min T S R
Time
Gain %
SSR+ N 1 2 3
K1
R
S
T
N
A1
A2
M
3
Fig-2
K1
0
K1
A1
A2
M
3
1
2
3
2 1 3
Normal
N
R
S
T
N T S R
Relay, which controls the liquid sequence by the problar cases,
when the liquid sequence decreases to the min. level then it
opens the exit relay. For opening of the relay again, it should
be react to the max.sequence. If there will not be liquid level
control SSR+min. and max. tip then it should short circuit.
Time Button: If FmFS perceives the voltage failures, exit relay
for off term of waiting.
% Button : FMFS determines the max. % value of any phase
which turns to 220V. (min.= 176 V, max. = 264 V)
Gain Button : It makes sensitivity adjustment according to the
FMFS liquid material.
Operating voltage : 220 V AC
Operating space : (0,8 1,2) x Un
Operating frequency (Hz) : 50 / 60 Hz
Relay contacts : 1 NO, 1NC
Ambient temperature : -5 C ; 50 C
Connection shape : Perpendicular in the panel or to do
terminal rail
Weight : 0,25 kg
Unbalanced voltage : Adjustable %20 or % 40
Order code : 9HB-A0000-0000
I
MOTOR PROTECTION, PHASE SEQUENCE and LIQUID LEVEL RELAY MOTOR PROTECTION, PHASE SEQUENCE and LIQUID LEVEL RELAY
MOTOR PHASE PROTECTION RELAY MOTOR PHASE PROTECTION RELAY
Pic-3
FSMK Phase sequence and motor protection
-2006
13/3
General :
Operating Voltage : 220 V AC, 24 V AC/DC
Relay Contacts : 1 NO , 1 NC
Contact power : 250 V / 5 A AC
Warning : Burning led when the relay is pulled out.
Assemblying Shape : Perpendicular screwing should be made
in to the panel or to do terminal ray
Ambient Temperature : - 10 C, + 60 C
Time Adjustment : 0-30 sn
Order code : 9HD-A0001-0030
Phase Sequency and Motor Protection Relays are designed to
prevent the failures of electric motors , which are used mostly
in industry systems.
General :
Motor will be switched off if it senses one or 2 phases for any
reason.
1. Phase Breaking :
Motor will be switced off if notr-phase voltage imbalance
overcomes the %20 limit (adjustable %40).
2. Voltage Imbalance :
At the positions of reverse of phase sequence , motor is not
switched on (when R, S and T is on the way of clock) With the
changing of phase sequence motor changing sequence switches
off.
3. Phase Seqeuence :
FT-30 Time Relay :
Works with a delay at induction. T time delay closes the contact
after waiting (0-30 sec) after the application of voltage to the
relay.
Pic-4
FT-30 time relay
Fig-3
Operating voltage : 380 V AC
Operating space : (0,8-1,2) x Un
Operating frequency (Hz) : 50 60 Hz
Relay contacts : 1 NA, 1 NK
Ambient temperature : -5 C ; +50 C
Connection shape : Perpendicular in the panel or to do
terminal ray
Weight : 0,15 kg
Unbalanced voltage : Adjustable %20 or % 40
Order code : 9HG-A0000-0000
K1
0
I
K1
A1
A2
M
3
1
2
3
2 1 3
Normal
N
R
S
T
N T S R
Time Relays which has a very wide usage are very important
for automation mechanism. Federal Time relays are manufactured
in the below mentioned types.
Operating Voltage : 220 V AC, 24 V AC/DC
Warning : Burning led when the relay is pulled out.
Assemblying Shape : Perpendicular screwing should be made
in to the panel or to do terminal ray
Ambient Temperature : - 10 C, + 60 C
Time Adjustment : 0-60 dk
X1 - X3 : Control input ends
X2 - a : 24 V input ends
Order code : 9HD-A0001-0060
Feeding
Contact
off
on
t
FT-60 Time Relay :
It is a multi functional time relay. FT-60 time relay can be operated
in the below mentioned operations.
Pic-5
FT-60 time relay
FT-30 operating prensible of time relay
PHASE SEQUENCY AND MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY PHASE SEQUENCY AND MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY
TIME RELAYS TIME RELAYS
13 13
-2006
13/4
FT-60 time relay can be operated above mentioned ways
A)
feeding
contact
off
on
t
Induction delay related to feeding voltage
C)
feeding entrance
contact
off
on
on
off
t t
Flashor is opened at first related to feeding voltage
D)
besleme girii
contact
off
on
on
off
t t
Flashor is closed at first related to feeding voltage
B)
feeding
contact
off
on
t
Release delay related to feeding voltage
E)
feeding entrance
contact on
t
on
off
t
off
Induction delay related to control entrance, it is active when the
control entrance is open.
Release delay related to control entrance, it is active when the control
entrance is open
F)
kontrol girii
kontak
off
on
off
on
t t
G)
feeding entrance
contact
off
on
off
on
t t
Induction delay related to control entrance, it is active when the
control entrance is closed.
H)
feeding entrance
contact
off
on
off
on
t t
Release delay related to control entrance, it is active when the control
entrance is closed.
I)
feeding entrance
contact
off
on
off
on
t t
Release delay related to control entrance, relay is opened when the
control entrance is opened. If the control entrance is closed it waits
about t delay and makes the relay closed.
J)
feeding entrance
contact
off
t
off
t
on
on
Release delay related to control entrance, relay is opened when the
control entrance is opened and waits for t delay. It becomes closed
and repeats the same operations when the control entrance is closed.
FT 60 TIME RELAY OPERATING WAYS FT 60 TIME RELAY OPERATING WAYS
-2006
13/5
General :
General :
Federal Thermostats are operated by the principle of two types
as on-off and time ratio control method. For on-off method it
opens when the temperature reaches at the value which it is set
and at the time of decrease up to setting hsyteresys value, it
close and continuous to operate.
Thermostat operates same as on-off method during the 4C0
up and down of setting value for time ratio control method. On
interval values it opens and closes according to selected control
period.
Operating Voltage : 220 V AC 50 Hz
Precautions : Burning led when the relay is pulled out.
Assemblying Shape : From front side to the panel
Oprerating Temperature : - 10 C, + 60 C
Entrance Frequency : Max. 130 Hz.
Counting space : 000000 - 999999
Multiplication frequency : 00.0001 - 99.9999
Reset time : 0.01-99.99 sn
Sensor feeding output : 12 V DC
Dimension : 72x72
Order code : 9KS-D0100-0000
Operating Voltage : 220 V. AC. /50-60 Hz.
Measurement space : 0-400 C
Power Comsumption : 3 W
Oprerating Temperature : -10 C, +60 C
Operating Compensation : 0-50 C
Hys Space : 2 C - 20 C (When On-off Control
Method Using)
Control Period : 10 sn. 200 sn.
Control Output : Relay (220 V. AC. 3A.)
Asseblying Shape : 1- on-off control method
2- Time ratio control method
Dimensions : 72x72 (FDT 72)
96x96 (FDT 96)
Order Code : 9KT-D0110-0400
9KT-D0210-0400
Pic-7
FDT72 Thermostat
Pic-6
FS 72 Counter
Federal Counter is the element that makes counting operations
related to multiplier factor and impulse entrance. Mistake ratio
is very small at counting operations because it is made by the
control of microprocessor. FS 72 can keep program parameters
and last values for 10 years in its memory even if the energy
is cut. Pulse can be entered to the counter by the help of
encoder, proximity switch and contact. Entrance frequency is
maximum 130 Hz.
COUNTERS COUNTERS
THERMOSTATS THERMOSTATS
13 13
-2006
13/6
6.5
50
1
0
9
5
7
62
Motor Protection, Phase Sequence and Liquid
Level Relay :
37
6.5
50 75
1
0
9
60
Phase Sequence and Motor Protection Relay :
Motor Phase Protection Relay :
Time Relay :
Counter : Thermostat (FDT72) : Thermostat (FDT96) :
7
1
0
8
.
5
1
2
6
.
5
49
65
10 1.5
72
7
2
9
2
96
9
6
8
2
72
7
2
DIMENSIONS OF RELAYS DIMENSIONS OF RELAYS
LOW VOLTAGE POWER CAPACITORS
C Type Low Voltage Power Capacitors
K Type Low Voltage Power Capacitors
CONTENTS
C Type Low Voltage Power Capacitors
FECSADP
5...30 kVAr
FECSADP
40-50 kVAr
FEK-23
12.5...30 kVAr
FEK-13
5-10 kVAr
K Type Low Voltage Power Capacitors
-2006
General Information About Low Voltage Power Capacitors
MKP Technology
Calculating Methods and Assembling Directions
Technical Characteristics of Low Voltage Power Capacitors
Dimensions of Low Voltage Power Capacitors
2
3
4
5
6
14/1
CONTENTS
LOW VOLTAGE POWER CAPACITORS
14 14
- Decreasing of electrics loses will be provided by the correction
of power factor.
- Network will support the additional load which will be
necessary for the widen system.
- The load will be decrease with the correction of power factor
at distribution and so; the equipments life will be long.
-2006
Loads of big networks generally have inductive characteristic.
Asynchronous motors, induction ovens, lamps with ballasts
are decreases the power coefficients of networks, which
inductive current relates them to. Decreasing the power
coefficient causes the loses at the energy conduction and
distribution lines and decreasing the voltage. This operation
also reduces the productivity. Loads, which have low power
of coefficients causes the alternators transformers and circuits,
part capacities to have big faults. At this position it is impossible
to benefit from the system. Low Voltage Power Capacitors
are manufactured in according to IEC 831-1/2 2 standards
and CE certificate.
General :
14/2
Over warning synchronous motors are used together with
capacitors at correction of reactive powers but usage ratio of
the capacitor is more prevalent than the synchronous motors.
Power Factor of the load defined as the ratio active power to
the externally power. When Cos Q comes near 1.00, less power
is inducted from the network. If CosQ=1, conduction of the
500 kW needs 722 A current at the 400 V three phase main
lines.
Conduction of some effective power at Cos Q= 0,6 will need
more current (1203 A). For this reason, distribution and
conduction equipments like feeding transformers should be
dimensioned for this high load.
- Conduction of the electrical power according to existing
standards is more expensive both consumers and network
distribution.
The other reason of the more cost is windings of transformer
and generator and losses of heating at conductors which the
systems all-current cause.
- In general conditions when the power of the three-phased
system is decreasing, current is increasing. Heating losses in
the system increases proportionally to square of current rising.
Power Factor :
Opposite capacitated reactive power, which is obtained by
capacitor to the system can be compensated with the inductive
reactive power that the electrical load needed. It assures
decreasing of the reactive power which is inducted from this
net work namel y power f act or correct i on (PFC).
Methods of Power Factor Correction:
Single or fixed PFC: Reactive Power Compensation of every
load and decreasing the load of feeding end (fixed and/or one
receiver with big power, for loads)
Group PFC: Connection of the one fixed capacitors to one
group synchronic working inductive load (exp. Motor groups,
discharge lamps)
Central PFC: It is used for electrical systems that have wide
connection of some capacitors to main power distribution
station or secondary station with a changeable load.
Capacitors are controlled by the microprocessor based reactive
power control relay that follows the need of the reactive power
at network.
Relay is connected to capacitor to compensate all loads
reactive power and to decrease all requirements to the network.
Methods of Power Factor Correction :
Result :
Accumulating the electrical load at alternative current circuits
are the materials, which are used to obtain capacitive reactions.
It is formed with a thin insulator and separated two conductor
panels. Electrical Load transportation capacity of a capacitor
is shown as C and it equals to the rate of the difference
between accumulated electrical load at panels (Q= Coulomb)
and potential difference between panels (V= Volt)
C = (Farad)
Capacitors :
Delta Connection of Capacitors :
Capacitor equipments are connected delta to get required power
capacitive unit at L.V.
As a result of experiences it is seen that diameters of the cylindrical
capacitor equipments are selected to have the quality to their heights.
With this application the life of the capacitor becomes 2 times longer.
As heating is proportional to currents square, reduction is the same.
So, it is being easy to manufacture capacitors, which are operating
at more higher temperatures.
Capacitors can be connected to network or consumer ends (delta
or star) at three phased alternative current systems.
If the capacity of the capacitor which is between two lines for delta
connection is shown as C

and for star connection the capacity of
the capacitor which is connected to every phase is shown as C
y.
Two zinc-metallizated polypropylene films are winded one
right after the other which are made of pure polypropylene
and used at manufacturing of power capacitors to correction
of consumers power coefficient. One of the films is right film
and the other film is left film. This means being the unmetallized
field left or right. Wideness of the films, thickness of the films,
winding number, active wideness, sliding distance determines
the capaci tors capaci ty val ue. These capaci ti es:
=
Are calculated according to equation. Here;
C = Capacity (F)
= Insulator ambient dielectric static (for pp film E=2,2 F/m)
A = Field of conductor panel [multiply of active wideness and
length of the film (m2)]
d = distance between the conductor panels [thickness of film
(mm)]
Zinc metallized film is obtained by covering of the
polypropylene film with zinc stream at vacuum. As a result
we get one face conductor and other face inductor film. Zinc
metallized polypropylene film is manufactured with vacuum
technology.
Base field of the cylindrical elements are covered with zinc.
With the help of the two zinc wired pistol and at the right
voltage. It is short-circuited and this material is sprayed to
base fields with zinc pressure air. These zinc particles are
sunk into the space, which exists by the sliding of two films.
The reason of the base fields covering with zinc is soldering
of the base field easily and having zinc cover of polypropylene
film. Contact connection of zinc to zinc should be appropriate.
. A
d
C
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT LOW VOLTAGE POWER CAPACITORS GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT LOW VOLTAGE POWER CAPACITORS
14 14
-2006
14/3
If it is accepted that Qc power is equal at each two systems,
C
y
=3C
Capacitor capacity, which is connected to every phase at

star connection, is 3 times higher than the capacity at delta
connection.
For this reason, delta connection is 1/3 times cheaper than
the star connection at low voltage systems where the difference
between phase and line voltage is not important for insulation.
Because of these financial reasons triangle connection is
preferred. Federal L.V. power capacitors are manufactured
with MKP technology.
MKP type is formed with a lower power loss dielectric which
is shaped with pure polypropilen foil. Zinc metalized film is
obtained by holding the polypropilen film to the zinc steam
under vacuum. Capacitor elements are dried with vacuum.
After placing the elements to the capacitor body, sticky
polyurethane resin ( mainly includes control oil ) or dry insulation
gas is put.
MKP :
- As a result of simple structure technology, MKP capacitors
are manufactured with using less material and low cost. So,
users pay less in price.
- MKP capacitors are generally simpler in structure than others,
although they have a thicker dielectric.
- MKP capacitors have special high capacitance and high a.c.
load capacity.
Long usage life safety is guaranteed with using the above-
ment i oned st ruct ure and hi gh qual i t y mat eri al .
Also, Federal capacitors take less place at capacitor switching
panels with smaller dimensions.
Advantages of MKP Technology :
FEDERAL Capacitors repair the punctures, which exist at low
voltage installations automatically. Arcs that exist during
puncture operation melt the metal stratum and these arcs
isolate the puncture field in the insulator. So, capacitor can
continue its operating without any problem by reaching full
voltage resistance. Capacity loss is too small so it can be
neglected for this reason.
Self-Repairing :
Protection is provided for overloads with the insulator fuse
that take place into the FEDERAL capacitors. Gas that occurs
frequently because of self-repairing operation causes a high
pressure at the body of the device. As a result of this, cables
between the connection terminals and windings break off
from the safety notch when the body of capacitor starts
stretching lengthwise. In this way, the capacitor is separated
from the network.
Protection from over load and failures for the safety of the
capacitor and system is shown at Fig-2.
Protection For Over Loads :
Fig-1 Zinc-Metalized Polypropilen Film
Coil
Unmetalizationed
Field
One Face Conductive
Polypropilen Field
Contact Stratum
Necessary reactive power for required power factor is
calculated as below:
Qc = P x (tan
1
-tan
2
)
P = Active power
S = Apparent power
Qc = Reactive power
Cos
1
= Present power coefficient
Cos
2
= Power coefficient which is required to reach.
(tan
1
-tan
2
) = Multiplying factor is shown in Table-1.
Calculating the Necessary Capacitor Capacity to
correct the Power Coefficient :
Fig-2 Before failure
Fig-3 After failure
Safety
notch
Safety
notch
MKP TECHNOLOGY MKP TECHNOLOGY
0.20 3.879 4.017 4.149 4.279 4.415 4.473 4.536 4.607 4.696 4.899
0.25 2.853 2.991 3.123 3.253 3.389 3.447 3.510 3.581 3.670 3.873
0.30 2.160 2.298 2.430 2.560 2.695 2.754 2.817 2.888 2.977 3.180
0.35 1.656 1.795 1.926 2.057 2.192 2.250 2.313 2.385 2.473 2.676
0.40 1.271 1.409 1.541 1.672 1.807 1.865 1.928 2.000 2.088 2.291
0.45 0.964 1.103 1.235 1.365 1.500 1.559 1.622 1.693 1.781 1.985
0.50 0.712 0.850 0.982 1.112 1.248 1.306 1.369 1.440 1.529 1.732
0.55 0.498 0.637 0.768 0.899 1.034 1.092 1.156 1.227 1.315 1.518
0.60 0.313 0.451 0.583 0.714 0.849 0.907 0.970 1.042 1.130 1.333
0.65 0.149 0.287 0.419 0.549 0.685 0.743 0.806 0.877 0.966 1.169
0.70 0.138 0.270 0.400 0.536 0.594 0.657 0.729 0.817 1.020
0.75 0.132 0.262 0.398 0.456 0.519 0.59 0.679 0.882
0.80 0.130 0.266 0.324 0.387 0.458 0.547 0.750
0.85 0.135 0.194 0.257 0.328 0.417 0.620
0.90 0.058 0.121 0.193 0.281 0.484
0.95 0.037 0.126 0.329
-2006
14/4
The effect time of this current rarely becomes lengthy than 1
or 2 period. At that time, isolation of the metallic foil towards
to capacitor protection is projected to be equal to 3,5 times
of the nominal voltages maximal value. Big arcs occur because
of the hardness of the capacitive current breaking when the
capacitors switch off. So, it is important to consider the
selecting of the keys, which are used in switching capacitor
installations, fuse and line connection elements. For this reason
connection elements, which are used at switching capacitor
installations, are different from the ones, which are used at
normal installations. These are selected for higher currents
than nominal currents, which equal to capacitor power.
Special compensation contactors, which are manufactured
by our factory, are advised for usage with compensation
key system. Contactors limit the rising current of capacitors
by the current limiting contact blocks, which they have.
Difference of the FEDERAL compensation contactors from
the general contactors is having a transition block which
has current limiting resistance connected parallel to main
contacts on contactor. So, contactor and the capacitor will
have 2 times more long life.
Example :
Active power : P=1000 kW
cos
1
=0,7 system, lets calculate the necessary capacitor
power to make cos
2
=0,96
Solution with table :
We should intersect the line and the column which are equal
to cos
1
=0,7 and cos
2
=0,96 to increase the power factor
from 0,7 to 0,96. Then we find multiplication factor =0,729.
Q
c
=500 x 0,729
Q
c
=365kVAr
Solution with formula :
Note: Effects of the events that appear during opening and
closing should be considered when material that is belonging
capacitor-switching installations is selected.
Capacitors induct high current similar to short circuit current,
which occurs during the temporary regime when they are
connected parallel and when the capacitors are switched off.
These currents value and period is related to capacitor power,
inductive resistance of network and specific frequency. If the
key is closed at the highest value of the voltage, current
strokes take the highest value.
Capacitors can be easily assembled by using M10 screw in
every position. Assembly screw can also be used as grounding
connection. Maximum squeezing torque is 5 Nm. Clemens
connections are made by applying 5 mm screw and
maximum 2 Nm- torque. Cable connection should be made
as it lets capacitor rise minimum 20 mm to make protection
in case of over pressure.
Assembling Directions
Warning! Only copper cable should be used at the
connection of the capacitors.
Table-1
Original
power factor
Cos
1
Cos
2
0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.92 0.94 0.96 0.98 1.00
Multiplier factor for
target power factor (tan
1
-tan
2
)
CALCULATING METHODS and ASSEMBLING DIRECTIONS CALCULATING METHODS and ASSEMBLING DIRECTIONS
-2006
14/5
Type
Rated Voltage
Frequency
Standardlar
Maximum Over Voltage
Over Current
Capacity Tolerance
Test Voltage, terminal / terminal
Test Voltage, terminal / body
Instantaneous flowing out current
Dielectric losses
Expected statistical life-time
Protection Class
Category of Ambient Temperature
Cooling
Permitted rated humidity
Permitted max altitude
Mounting position
Mounting
Safety features
Dielectric
Filling
Discharging resistances
FECSADP 13
400 V
50 Hz
IEC 60831-1/2 EN 60831-1/2, CE
Un + %10 up to 8 hours for each days
Un + %15 up to 30 min. for each days
Over voltages pasting %15 should not be
over 200 times than the capacitor's life
1.3xIn
- 5%+10%
2.15xUn AC 2 sec.
3 kV AC 10 sec.
Max. 200 In
0.25 W/kVAr
100.000 hours ........... ( class-25/C )
With standard terminal cover : IP 20
With special proctetor: IP 54
-25/D
Natural air cooling
Max % 95
2000 m above sea level
Any position possible
Threaded M12 stud at the bottom of the case
Overpressure tear-off fuse
MKP- metallized polypropylene film self
healing
Soft resin, non PCB
Internal - 1 min. 50 V
FEK 13
400 V
50 Hz
IEC 60831-1/2 EN 60831-1/2, CE
1.5xIn
- 5%+10%
2.15xUn AC 2 sn
3 kV 10sn
Max. 100 In
0.3 W/kVAr
100.000 hours ........... ( class-25/C )
80.000 hours.............( class-25/D )
-25/D
Natural air cooling
Max % 95
healing
Soft resin, non PCB
exterior - 3 min, 75 V
FEK 23
400 V
50 Hz
IEC 60831-1/2 EN 60831-1/2, CE
1.5xIn
- 5%+10%
2.15xUn AC 2 sn
3 kV 10sn
Max. 100 In
0.3 W/kVAr
100.000 hours ........... ( class-25/C )
80.000 hours.............( class-25/D )
-25/D
Natural air cooling
Max % 95
healing
Soft resin, non PCB
Internal - 1 min. 50 V
Other voltage, power and frequency value capacitors are manufactured for special orders.
5
10
12.5
15
20
25
30
40
50
FKK 13 0.4/5
FECSADP1 0.4/5
FKK 13 0.4/10
FECSADP1 0.4/10
FKK 23 0.4/12.5
FECSADP1 0.4/12.5
FKK 23 0.4/15
FECSADP1 0.4/15
FKK 23 0.4/20
FECSADP1 0.4/20
FKK 23 0.4/25
FECSADP1 0.4/25
FKK 23 0.4/30
FECSADP1 0.4/30
FECSADP1 0.4/40
FECSADP1 0.4/50
7.2
14.4
18
21.7
28.9
36.1
43.3
57.7
72
3x33.2
3x66.4
3x83
3x100
3x133
3x166
3x199
3x265
3x332
65x200
85x175
75x255
85x245
85x235
85x245
90x260
110x245
100x245
110x261
100x300
110x261
100x370
146x220
146x261
146x355
0.75
1.20
0.80
1.60
1.40
1.60
1.60
2.60
2.00
2.60
2.40
2.90
2.60
3.80
4.40
6.00
4
1
4
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
2
3
9SD-BA000-0500
9SA-BA000-0500
9SD-BA000-1000
9SA-BA000-1000
9SE-BA000-1250
9SA-BA000-1250
9SE-BA000-1500
9SA-BA000-1500
9SE-BA000-2000
9SA-BA000-2000
9SE-BA000-2500
9SA-BA000-2500
9SE-BA000-3000
9SA-BA000-3000
9SC-BA000-4000
9SC-BA000-5000
Please contact our company for other voltage, power and frequency demands.
Expansion of FECSADP1 0,4/5 Type Code: FE: Federal Elektrik, C: Compensation, S: 3 Phases, A: Air Cooling, D: IP20, (K:IP00),
P: MKP, 1: Configuration no., Rated Voltage (kV), 5: Capacitor power (kVAr).
FKK 13 0.4/5 Type Code: F: Federal, K: Dry Type (MKP), K: Capacitor; 0,4: Rated Voltage (kV) 5:Capacitor power (kVar)
Highest average value at periods.
Symbol Minimum Maximum 24 hours 1 year
25/C 25 C 50 C 40 C 30 C
25/D 25 C 55 C 45 C 35 C
Ambient Temperature Categories
Power (kVAr) Type
Current
In (A)
Capacity
(F)
Dimensions
DxH (mm)
Weight (kg) Drawing No Order Codes
Tree Phase Power Capacitors: 400 V, 50 Hz, IP 20 (40 kVAr and 50 kVAr IP 00) MKP dry type
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF LOW VOLTAGE POWER CAPACITORS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF LOW VOLTAGE POWER CAPACITORS
14 14
-2006
14/6
H
+
3
3
H
16
M12
35
46
D+5
D
4
7

1
5
1
M 12
2
6
1
1
6
146
64
32 M 10
M12
1
6
M10
64
32
4
7
3
5
5
146

1
5
1
C Type :
4
5
1
H
2
M12
1
2
D
1
D+3
3
7
.
5
15.3
H
2
M12
1
6
48.3 0.8
D1
K Type :
DIMENSIONS OF LOW VOLTAGE POWER CAPACITORS DIMENSIONS OF LOW VOLTAGE POWER CAPACITORS
15 15
CONTENTS
FX Series Reactive Power Control Relay
EasyVAr
Reactive Power Control Relay

-2006
Generation Information and Order Codes About Reactive Power Control Relays
Generation Information and Order Codes About EasyVAr

Reactive Power Control Relays
Dimensions of Reactive Power Control Relays
2
3
4
15/1
FX5 FX7 FX12
CONTENTS
FX Series Reactive Power Control Relay
EasyVAr
Reactive Power Control Relay

EV96 EV144
REACTIVE POWER CONTROL RELAY REACTIVE POWER CONTROL RELAY
-2006
15/2
Working Characteristics :
It is easy to use of the front panel,there are plenty functions
with 3 keys.
- The changes on the choosen function is made by using
up and down keys.
- The relay is not effected by hormonic currents.
- The breakdown of the condenser or contactors in the
course of time increasing of the reactive power which is
used by institution can obstruct to reach the required power
factor.
In this case the warning will be operated by alarm contacts
which enters in to the term.
All of the alarm warning cases can be followed from the
front panel LEDs.
It will advisable to connect warning lamp or voiced-warning
to the alarm circuit.
General :
FX serial reactive power control unit senses digitally the
system current and measures in a sensible maner the power
factor of the installation. In cases where the values are out
of calculated power factor, capacitor input or output the
current. As known C/k value determines the compensation
initiating current, In cases where C/k value is raised
compensation initiating process is slowed down this way in
case where the load is reduced permanently capacitor taking
in and out to the circuit is prevented. Capacitor contactors
are operated through the relay within the device. Such relays
are resistant to temporary current regimes and on off stroke
current and though the filters used in contact tips, arc are
reduced to minimum. Federal relays are manufactured
according to CE certificate.
- The time of the pace stepping: It will be adjustable at 8 99
sn sensitives
- The power consumption: 6 VA max
- Weight : 0,8 kg.
- Working heat : -10 0C with + 70 0C
- Storing heat : - 20 0C with + 80 0C
- Order code FX5 : 9HA-0000-0005
FX7 : 9HA-0000-0007
FX12 : 9HA-0000-0012
! The fast power factor correction is required in such institutions
(petroleum stations, welding store, plastic covering etc...) It is
advised to keep lower of the pace stepping time.
! Please check regularly to adjustment values straightness and
working in good conditions of the compansation.
! The current transformer of the reactive relay should be put
into the phase which is feeding. For example; if the relay is fed
from the R phase, transformer should be onto the R phase,
before loading after main power switch.
! At the end of the working hours or night hours, there must be
a used fixed condensor where there is very little lighting load.
Factory exit values of the reactive power control relays:
- Cos : 0.99
- The time of the pace stepping : 8 sec.
- Program : 3
Pic-1 Reactive power control unit
- Type: FX5, FX7, FX12
- Working voltage: 220 V (50/60Hz) %20
(The other voltages depending on the requirements.)
- Working current: 5 A continual
should be choose from
the first panel , 1,2,2 ...... at its system , 2 or next capacities,
1,2,4,4 .... at its system , 3 or next capacities 1,2,4,8,8 ........
at its system 4,next capacities works at the turning system
- The exit contact capacities : 1,5 A
- Cos adjustment: 0,95 - 1.00 Enductive.
- c / k adjustment: 0,00-1,00 between 0,05 at intervalse.
Connection Diagram of FX Series and EasyVAr

:
Fig-2
Fig-1
A
A A
M Lighting
Reactive
relay
K
Main transformer
Current
transformer
...../5A.
Capasitor group
Alert
Contact
LOAD
GENERATION INFORMATION AND ORDER CODES ABOUT REACTIVE POWER CONTROL RELAYS GENERATION INFORMATION AND ORDER CODES ABOUT REACTIVE POWER CONTROL RELAYS
15 15
-2006
15/3
Technical Features
- Type : EasyVAr
- Operating Modes : 1111-1222-1244-1248
- Number of level : 4-12
- Operating Voltage : 220V(50Hz), + - %20
- Operating Current : 5A continuous
- Output Contact Capacity : 1,5 A continuous; 10A surge
- Stepping period : between 1-30 sec.
- Power consumption : 6 VA max.
- Weight : 800 gr.
- Operating Temperature : -100C+700C
- Storing Temperature : -200C+800C
- Cos

setting : 0, 95-0, 96-0, 97-0, 98-0, 99
inductive:0, 98-0,99 capacitive
- Order Codes :9HA-DF000-B000 (EV96)
:9HA-DC000-B000 (EV144)
General
EV96 and EV144 LCD reactive relay can display the voltage,
current, active power and reactive power on the bounded
phase as measuring, with cos . Current input is sensitive to
perceive up to 10mA and max.input current value is 5,5A. If
it is used with 2000/5 current transformer, it can perceive 4A
on the bounded phase. The relay has fairly understandable
and easy adjustment construction through the wide LCD screen,
because of display all value with their units. All values are
displayed with current cos accept inductive and capacitive
cos limit adjustments. Also capacities which are in the circuit
are displayed on the screen.
11
6
7
8
9
10
3
2
4
5
12
13
14
16
17 15 18
1
Menu button: It is possible to see the values of current, voltage,
active power and capacities as pushing the menu button. Also
for adjusting the reactive relay it is necessary to use it.
Adjustment button: If changing is desired on the value which
we reach by menu button, it is necessary to use this button.
Above-below button: It is used for selecting the adjustment
value.
1. Capacitor groups
2. Power Factor
3. Cos

symbol
4. Active Power symbol
5. V, A, VAr, kVAr symbol
6. Symbol of Stepping Period
7. Capacitive cos
8. Inductive cos
9. Automatic switch on/off capacitors

10. Warning symbol
11. Symbol which shows to make adjustment
12. Symbol which shows to activate and deactivate of capacitors
by manual
13. Memory symbol
14. Number of capacity adjustment symbol
15. Switch mechanism adjustment symbol
16. Value of min.capacity symbol (*)
17. Symbol of Current Transformer primary current value (**)
18. Variable symbol (The area where shown all the information
without cos )
(*) EV144, choosing 9 level distance of 4-12
EV96, choosin 3 level distance of 4-6
(**) Because of min. capacity value and current transformer
primary are entered seperately, it is not also necessary to adjust
c/k value.
Note: Together with these function features, during the stabilized
of system, EasyVAr can obtain to see real power of capacity
if it is switch on/off one by one on manual capacity screen.
Active Power Screen: Amount of active power, which bounded
the phase of reactive relay, placed under
the W or kW unit and cos information
when the active power is displayed on the
screen. For correct value, primary current
value of current transformer should be
entered correctly.
The Value of Current Transformer Primary Current Adjustment
Screen: It is the value of current transformer
primary current, which bounded the
reactive relay. For example, for 2000/5
current transformer, the value of 2000
should be entered. The value will be
displayed with D icon. In order to adjust,
adjustment button should be pushed and after the menu button
will be displayed the desire value will be taken by above-below
button. As the value will be changed by fives for each pushed
of the buttons, if the buttons will be pushed continuously, the
value amount will be increased. In this way, the value will be
adjusted by 5000 easily. Factory adjustment is given as 5.
Power of Minimum Capacity Adjustment Screen: The capacitor
power, which bounded as first capacity
should be informed to reactive relay with
kVAr unit. It is so important to enter this
value correctly for an active compensation.
This value is displayed with C icon on
LCD. Factory adjustment is given as 0,5
kVAr
Screen Function :
Programming
The reactive relay is programmed by four buttons on the front
panel.
Programming Examples
Pic-2 EasyVAr Reactive Power Control Relay
GENERATION INFORMATION AND ORDER CODES ABOUT EasyVAr
REACTIVE POWER CONTROL RELAYS GENERATION INFORMATION AND ORDER CODES ABOUT EasyVAr
REACTIVE POWER CONTROL RELAYS

-2006
15/4
DIMENSIONS OF REACTIVE POWER CONTROL RELAYS DIMENSIONS OF REACTIVE POWER CONTROL RELAYS
144
1
4
4
74
65
9
1
4
9
96
9
6
78
63
1
3
8
1
2
0
FX5, FX7, FX12 and EV144 :
EV96 :
CONTENTS
Analogue Panelmeters
Power Analyser
Digital Panelmeters
-2006
General Information About Panelmeters and Technical Characteristic of Analogue Panelmeters
Order Codes of Analogue Panalmeters
Technical Characteristic and Order Codes of Digital Panelmeters
Technical Characteristic and Order Codes of 3 Phases Digital Panelmeters
General Information About Power Analyser
Dimensions of Panelmeters
2
3
3
4
5
6
16/1
FMA 72 - 96 FF 72 - 96 FV 72 - 96 FA 72 - 96
FPA-100
FYA72 - 96 FYV72 - 96 FYA96-3F FYV96-3F
CONTENTS
Power Analyser
Digital Panelmeters
16 16
PANELMETERS PANELMETERS
Power Analyser
Digital Panelmeters
General :
Measurement is the comparison of known and unknown gravity.
Ammeter :
Ammeters are the devices which measure the intensity current
of a electrical current (amount of the current which passes
through the conductor). They are connected serial to the
receiver at a electrical circuit. Current of a receiver should
pass inside of the ammeter. The ammeter measures this
current but therefore the current passign should not face
difficulty. For this reason internal resistance of the ammeter
should be low (0-1 Ohm). For the minority of ammeter
resistance, the coil is wound with lesser coil than thick cross-
sectioned conductors. Value that the ammeter measures is
shown with I and it is expressed with A. (exp I=10 A) There
are ammeters which measure both AC and DC instead of
Direct Current (DC) and Alternative Current ( AC). It is very
important that there should be a measurement device of DC
or AC when the ammeter is connected to the circuit. Inducted
highest average current value can be seen with Demandmeter
ammeters in 15 minutes. If it is required, ammeters with
demantmeter can be manufactured in the periods of 5 or 8
minutes. Instead of ammeters with indicator electronic (digital)
ammeters can be manufactured and the usage of these
products are spreading rapidly. Reading with these ammeters
and usage characteristics are similar to the analogue ammeters.
However, it is essential that ammeters should be connected
to a circuit in a serial manner, otherwise they can burn out or
damage its circuit when they are connected parallel.
Voltmeter :
Voltmeters are the devices, which measure the voltage of the
circuit or the receiver (potential difference). Voltmeters are
connected to the receiver of which the voltage will be measured,
parallel.
Voltmeters are connected parallel to receiver so, the current
can pass through them. Inside resistance should be high for
the minority of these currents. To provide this, opposite situation
to ammeters coils will be used. That is, having more winds
than the thin cross-sectioned conductor. The value, which the
voltmeter measures is shown as U and its unit is expressed
with V. (exp U=220V) There are two kinds of voltmeters. One
is DC voltmeter and the other is AC voltmeter. Also there are
voltmeters, which measure both DC and AC. Much attention
should be paid to this situation before connecting voltmeter
to the circuit. Digital voltmeters are used instead of indicator
(analog) voltmeters. Like ammeters, usage of these products
are spreading rapidly. Because there is less reading failure
with these products, they take up less place and their costs
are decreasing accordingly. Voltmeters are connected parallel
to the circuit. Products are not damaged if they are connected
serially by mistake. But there will be a high resistance at the
circuit because of this. Then the receiver will not operate as
required.
Frequencymeter :
Frequencymeter is the device, which measures the frequency.
Frequencymeter shows the number of the cycles in 1 second
and its unit is cycle/second or Hertz. Frequencymeters are
connected parallel to circuit which frequency will be measured
like voltmeters. They are produced for being connected between
phases and neutral-phases.
Measurement Device Classes :
Percentage expression of the failure ratio of the measurement
devices at the maximum voltage.
0,1- 0,2 Class: devices, which will be used at producing of
measurement devices.
0,5-1 Classes: devices, which are generally, used movable.
1,5-2,5 Classes: cable type devices, which are used at industrial
measurements.
-2006
16/2
1.5
Moving iron
45 - 65 Hz
1.2 x In
10 x In
1 VA
2000 V
Scale vertical position
IEC 60051-2/EN 60051-2, CE
3
Bimetal
45 - 65 Hz
1.2 x In
10 x In
2.2 VA
2000 V
IEC 60051-2/EN 60051-2, CE
1.5
Moving iron
45 - 65 Hz
1.2 x Un
2 x Un
3 VA
2000 V
IEC 60051-2/EN 60051-2, CE
Federal analogue meters are manufactured as class 1.5 and 3.0 according to IEC60051-2 / EN 60051-2 standards and CE
certificate. There is no need to stock for Ammeters due to interchangeable scale system. Only scale is sufficient to have in stock.
Accuracy class
Operating method
Operating frequency
Continuously overload (2 hour)
Short-time overload
Consumption (Max.)
Insulation testing voltage
Operating position
Standards
Dimensions
Type
Measuring wave form
Measuring range
From 10 A to 100 A (Direct)
From 30/5A to 4000/5A (Current Trans.)
FA 72 FV 72
250 V ve 500 V
1.5
Moving coil
45 - 55 Hz
1,2 x Un, 1,2 x 55 Hz
2 x Un
1 VA
2000 V
IEC 60051-2/EN 60051-2, CE
AC (r.m.s)
45 - 55 Hz and 55 - 65 Hz
Ammeters
Max. Demand
Ammeters
Voltmeters Frequencymeters
FMA 72
1 A, 5 A Direct (15 min.)
X/5 A with current trans. (15 min.)
FA 96
96 X 96
FMA 96
96 X 96 96 X 96 96 X 96
FV 96 FF 96
AC (r.m.s) AC (r.m.s) AC (r.m.s)
FF 72
72 X 72 72 X 72 72 X 72 72 X 72
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT PANELMETERS AND TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTIC OF ANALOGUE PANELMETERS GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT PANELMETERS AND TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTIC OF ANALOGUE PANELMETERS
-2006
16/3
Technical
Characteristics :
Type
Measurement wave form
Measuring Range
Accuracy Class
Operating frequency
Operating level distance
Permanent overload
Feeding Voltage
Dimensions
Order Code
FYA 72 - FYA 96
AC (rms)
0 -200 A direct
0 -10 A direct,
0 - 9999 A (with C. T)
1
50 Hz
-5C / 55C
(0,8 - 1,2)xUn
1,2 x In
220 V AC
72 x 72 - 96 x 96
9KB-DA110-0200
9KB-DA211-0000
Ammeter
Federal digital meters are manufactured as class 1.0 according to EN 60051-2 standards and CE certificate.
FYV 72 - FYV 96
AC (rms)
0 - 500 V
1
50 Hz
-5C / 50C
(0,8 - 1,2)xUn
1,2 x Un
220 V AC
72 x 72
9KV-DA110-0500
9KV-DA210-0500
Voltmeter
FYA 96 - 1R
AC (rms)
0 -10 A direct,
0 - 9999 A (with C. T)
1
50 Hz
-5C / 55C
(0,8 - 1,2)xUn
1,2 x In
220 V AC
96 x 96
9KC-DA210-0000
Ammeter (with 1 Relay)
FYA 96 - 2R
AC (rms)
0 -10 A direct,
0 - 9999 A (with C. T)
1
50 Hz
-5C / 55C
(0,8 - 1,2)xUn
1,2 x In
220 V AC
96 x 96
9KD-DA210-0000
Ammeter (with 2 Relay)
DIGITAL AMMETER (FYA72-FYA96)
Federal Digital ammeter obtain to measure up to 9999A (rms) with current transformer,when the current transformer ratio is
entered. Ammeter memory is reseted by single button and beginning from this time,min. and max. current value can be seen
on the screen. Digital ammeters with relays are produced for industries which requires current limited.
DIGITAL VOLTMETER(FYV72-FYV96)
Federal Digital Voltmeter measure the AC voltage between 0-500V sensitively .It is obtain to seen min. and max. voltage
beginning from reset of memory.
FA 72
FA 96
FMA 72
FMA 96
FV 72
FV 96
FF 72
FF 96
72x72
96x96
72x72
96x96
72x72
96x96
72x72
96x96
Direct
With current transformer
Direct
Direct
Direct
9KA-AA120-
9KA-AA121-
9KA-AA220-
9KA-AA221-
9KA-MA120-
9KA-MA121-
9KA-MA220-
9KA-MA221-
Order Codes :
Direct
Direct
Direct
Direct
9KV-AA120-
9KV-AA220-
9KF-A0120-0055
9KF-A0220-0055
Type Dimension Using Type Order Code
: Measuring range of ammeter is written (Amper)
Types for direct using: 0010, 0015, 0020, 0025, 0040, 0050, 0080, 0100.
Types used with current tranformer: 0030, 0040, 0050, 0060, 0080, 0100, 0200, 0250, 0300, 0400, 0500, 0600, 0800, 1000, 1200, 1500, 2000,
2500, 3000, 4000.
: Measuring range of voltmeter is written like 0250, 0500.
16 16
ORDER CODES OF ANALOGUE PANALMETERS ORDER CODES OF ANALOGUE PANALMETERS
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTIC AND ORDER CODES OF DIGITAL PANELMETERS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTIC AND ORDER CODES OF DIGITAL PANELMETERS
General :
FPA100 Power Analyser is manufactured for measuring the
expended power on 3-phase system. 10 measurement
informations can be displayed simultaneously.3 pieces
programmable relay output allows to take precautions against
the abnormal conditions and with standard RS232 port the
values which measured by analyser can be followed and
registered from computer.
Programming Features
Before using our device which have rich options you should
enter some values. These simple values;
1. Voltage transformer ratio
2. Current transformer ratio.
3. Low Voltage value (When the voltage falls down under the
adjusted value, sending signal of which relay is adjusted by
this function.
4. High voltage value and relay output (if setting value is
exceeded, relay operates.)
5. Low current value and relay output (if it is fallen down from
the setting value, relay operates.)
6. High voltage value and relay output (if setting value is
exceeded, relay operates)
7. Enductive low power factor value and relay output. (If it is
fallen down from the setting value, relay operates.)
8. Capacitive high power factor value and relay output (if it
i s fal l en from the setti ng val ue, rel ay operates)
9. Alarm function operate delay after energise as second.
10. Delay of alarm output ,after exceeded the setting value,
11. Network number of device.(1-250,1 is entered for single
using)
12. Communication speed.(1200-2400-4800-9600-19200-
38400 baud)
13. Parity (none, odd, even)
-2006
16/4
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTIC AND ORDER CODES OF 3 PHASES DIGITAL PANELMETERS
General :
FYA96-3F and FYV96-3F are designed for displaying
voltage of three phases and phase currents without
any selector switch simultaneously. Input of ammeters
is 5A and can be used to display directly as entering
the factor ratio up to 9999.
Federal digital meters are manufactured as class 1.0 according to EN 60051-2 standards and CE certificate.
Technical Characteristic :
Type
Measurement wave form
Measuring Range
Accuracy Class
Operating method
Operating frequency
Operating level distance
Permanent overload
Feeding Voltage
Dimensions
Order Code
FYA96-3F
AC (rms)
0 -10 A directly,
0 - 9999 A (With Current Trasformer)
1
Elektronic (ADC)
50 Hz
-5C / 50C
(0,8 - 1,2)xUn
1,2 x In
220 V AC
96 x 96
9KE-DA211-0000
FYV96-3F
AC (rms)
0 - 500 V
1
Elektronic (ADC)
50 Hz
-5C / 50C
(0,8 - 1,2)xUn
1,2 x Un
220 V AC
96 x 96
9KE-DA210-0000
Ammeter Voltmeter
Voltmeters are manufactured according to 3x500 V P-
P voltage and as entering the 0.01-99.99 factor ratio
it can be used sensitively for different voltage
transformer in various area. Voltmeters with indicator
are manufactured optionally and can be manufactured
upon request.
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT POWER ANALYSER GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT POWER ANALYSER
16 16
Screen Features :
LCD screen that is illuminated by white light obtain to read
measurement values easly. For practical using and
understandable, LCD screen is separated 4 main parts. In this
way it allows to watch measured 10 information at the same
time. If these 4 main parts exanimate briefly:
1.Neutral voltages, phase-phase voltages and power factor
of each phase can be seen on 3 digits 3 pieces display which
state on the top of the left side. As pushing single button, this
feature can be changed and measurements units flashes on
two side of digit.
(For example: L1 220V,L12 380V)
2.4 dijit 3 piece display states on the top of the right side and
current for each phase, apparent power, active power and
reactive power can be seen. As pushing a single button, this
feature can be changed and measurement units flash on the
right side of digit.
3. 5+3 digit 3 pieces displays state on the bottom of the right
side. On this part instantaneous or total expended apparent
power, active and reactive power can be seen. Also these
values can be displayed as 3-phase total or separately .Here,
power meter can be reseted. As pushing a single button this
feature can be changed and measurement units flash on two
side of the digit.
4.At the bottom of the left side phase angle or network frequency
are displayed.
-2006
16/5
1
4
2
3
Order Codes
Analyzer : 9KG-A1000-0005
Analyzer (with energy option) : 9KG-A7000-0000
Analyzer (200A directly) : 9KG-C1000-0200
For options: 9KG-A7000-0
:Options are written (Recording of
energy meters are standard.)
For 8 level compansation features : 008
For RS485 Modbus RTU features : 400
For 8 level compansation and RS485
Modbus RTU features : 408
Remote control program : YB-000
: Number of user.
for single user: 1; for 10 user: 2; for 20 user: 3
Technical Features
Feeding Voltage : 220V AC - + %20,50Hz
Measuring Voltage Input : 3x500 V (phase-phase),3x300 V
(phase-neutral)
Measuring Current Input : 3x5(6) A, 3x200A (optional)
Power Consumption : <4 VA
Class : < % 1
Measured Max. Values : 500kV,9999A,99999.999kW (kWh)
(More bigness values can be followed from computer)
Dimensions : 144x144 mm
Function Button :
1. area control button
Enter of simple values
Value reset
General Features
-Voltage, current and power information are calculated as total
and separately for each phase on the 3-phase system and
displayed on display or computer screen.
-User-friendly with 3 push button.
- Except the various type of precautions and conditions symbol.
10 information can be displayed on the screen at the same
time
-Measurement values are better than 1% at 4 quadrants.
-Small voltages can be measured sensitively (10V at 300 scale)
-Definition to voltage and current factor.
- Optional compensation up to 8-16-20 levels
-Standard RS232 connection and RS485 network option with
optic insulation
-5A suitable for using X5 current transformer or direct
200A(optional) current input alternatives
-3 piece programmable relay output
-As type of failure and danger, back white illumination flashes.
-Fibber optic connection (optic receiver-transmitter which
information transfer is suitable up to 20km)
- Software and hardware which ensure to record energy meter
to data for energy failures.
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT POWER ANALYZER GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT POWER ANALYZER
-2006
16/6
D
D
A
A
B
B
Analgue Panelmeters :
Digital Panelmeters :
A
72
96
B
66
90
C
75
75
D
68 0.5
92 0.5
Dimensions (mm)
72 x 72
96 x 96
C
D
D
B
C
A
A
A
72
96
B
44
55
C
6.5
8
D
69
90
Dimensions (mm)
72 x 72
96 x 96
60
Panel Assembling Dimensions 138x138 mm
DIMENSIONS OF PANELMETERS DIMENSIONS OF PANELMETERS
Power Analyzer :
144
1
4
4
MULTI-TARIFF ELECTRONIC
ENERGY METERS
CONTENTS
FMS601-FSM50
Single Phase
FTS3 - FTS3H - FTS3K
Three Phase
FSM60
Single Phase
FMS602
Single Phase
(Analogue)
FTS3D - FTS3HD - FTS3KD
Three Phase
General Information About Multi-Tariff Electronic Energy Meters
Technical Characteristics of Multi-Tariff Electronic Energy Meters
Dimensions of Multi-Tariff Electronic Energy Meters
17/1
CONTENTS
2
3
4
-2006
MULTI-TARIFF ELECTRONIC
ENERGY METERS
17 17
General :
- Single phased and threephased Federal active electronic
energymeters are produced according to IEC 61036, threephased
active + reactive energymeters are produced according to IEC
61268, IEC 61036 standards and CE certificate.
- Federal Energy meters are able to seperate 1 day into 8 time
periods and to designate these time periods as weekdays,
Saturdays and Sundays.
- Energy meters are avaible on LCD display screen that has a
minimum 10 years working life and wide working temperature
range.
- All information about the total energy consumption tariffs, date,
hour intervals are avaible with LCD display screen.
- With LCD display screen, the number has a range of 5 digits
and the decimal has a range of 3 digits and all information can
be read easily from 1,5 meters distance.
- Energy meters have a warning system and this system operates
when the battery life comes to critic level. It perceives the real time
clock damages, front cover and terminal cover opening
interferences ( even the energy is cut off), and notifies this in its
LCD display screen with a code and then it records these
interferences to its memory.
- There is a real time clock in the energymeter to evulate the
subscribers consumption of calendar affiliation, to apply multi
time tariffs and to realize other application on the base of time.
Energy consumption will be written on daytime bases if the real
clock stops for any problem. The cell that feeds the real time clock
on the energymeter has a 10 years operating life and 4 years
shelf life. The deviation value of real time clock is maximum 0,47
second/ date. It can be adjusted to forward or reverse the clocks
authomatically.
8-Tariff periods ( codes) :
a) T1-Daytime (06:00-17:00)
b) T2- Evening (17:00- 22:00)
c) T3-Night (22:00-06:00)
d) T4- Other necessities (holiday)...etc
Federal presents its multi-tariff electronic energy meters which
has been developed by our own R&D Team. Energy meters to
be used for industrial or households porposes are avaible as
single phase and three phase types.
They are produced in accuracy class of 1.Energy meters
produced with time-tariff, can also be used with pre-payment
system.If required it is possible to use with or without card. The
time periods are able to be defined as multi-tariff.
The main objective is to ensure more productive usage by
spreading electric energy into 24 hours and to make the user
become conscious regarding electric consumption.
Energy Meter has 4 tariffs and seperates the day 8 different
times and there can be tariffs for Saturday and Sunday to obtain
the electrics instruction tariff. The main goal at making different
tariffs is to spread the electric energy consumtion equally over
24 hours and to make consumers conscious to how much
energy they are consuming. User can direct the consumption
by checking energy meters information. Tariff using will direct
the consumers towards using the cheaper hours of electric.
Federal Multi-Tariff Energy meters :
Voltage
sensor
Current
sensor
Battery
CPU+Measurement
Relay (Optional)
RTC (Real time clock)
LCD (Liquid crystal display)
Smart card (Optional)
Optical interface
Led (IMP/kWh)
EEPROM
Fig-1 Technical diagram of Multi-Tariff enegy meters
Because of fast developments for electronic products,
electromagnetic meters transform into electronic meter. Electronic
meters are a solution for following and reducing the losses at
close range.
17/2
-2006
-Illegal connection on distribution network
-Measurement fault
-Changes on electro mechanic meters by users.
Following ,manage and reduce the losses of Electric energy
consumption is possible to measures correctly. Using of electronic
electric energy meters is obtained by laws. Sensitive measurement
and illegal operation are prevented with electronic electric meters.
Reason of Losses :
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT MULTI-TARIFF ELECTRONIC ENERGY METERS GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT MULTI-TARIFF ELECTRONIC ENERGY METERS
17 17
17/3
-2006
FMS601
1 phased 2 wires
220 V
10 (60) A
= 8.5 mm
LCD
1000
0.004 Ib
50%2
Active (Single phased)
1
6 KV, 1.2/50 s
< 0.47 sec./day
50 Hz / 1 dk 4 kV
27 MHz - 1 GHz, 10 V/m
Contact discharge, 8 kV
%95
-20 C...+60 C
-25 C...+70 C
IP 51 (IEC 60529)
ABS, Self-extinguishing, recycled, High Uv resistance material
BMC ( it has a resistance of Dynamic and Thermal shocks)
Optic port (IEC 61107), smart card (IEC/ISO 7816)
Unerasable memory (EEPROM), battery
Different coefficients at weekdays and weekends (Saturday-Sunday) related to tariff units
Separating 1 day to 8 in the sensetive of minute
Real time hour and calendar (authomatic hour application of summer/winter)
9PE-ABBB1-0060 9PD-ABBB1-0050 9PD-ABBB1-0060
: Direct connected energy meter rated current, : Optional
Type
Nominal voltage AC
(-%20Un...+%15Un)
Nominal (max) current AC
Connections
Screen
Test output imp /KWh
Beginning current (mA)
Nominal frequency (Hz)
Measurement type
Accuarcy class
Control input (Voltage Endurance)
Time accuarcy (23 Cde)
Insulation
Electro-magnetic high frequency
Electrostatic discharge (IEC 61036-4-2)
Relative humidity
Ambient temperature
Storing temperature
Protection class
Materials
Terminal materials
Communication
Data protection
Tariff coefficient
Tariff units
Integrated/Calendar coupling clock
Order code
FTS3-FTS3D (Active)
3 phased 4 wires
3 x 220 / 380 V
3 x 10 (60) A
2 x 16 character LCD
Active (3 phased) direct
= 10 mm
1000
0.004 Ib
50%2
1
6 KV, 1.2/50 s
< 0.47 sec./day
50 Hz / 1 dk 4 kV
27 MHz - 1 GHz, 10 V/m
Contact discharge, 8 kV
%95
-20 C...+60 C
-25 C...+70 C
IP 51 (IEC 60529)
ABS, Self-extinguishing, recycled, High Uv resistance material
BMC ( it has a resistance of Dynamic and Thermal shocks)
Optic port (IEC 61107), smart card (IEC/ISO 7816)
Unerasable memory (EEPROM), battery
Different coefficients at weekdays and weekends (Saturday-Sunday) related to tariff units
Separating 1 day to 8 in the sensetive of minute
Real time hour and calendar (authomatic hour application of summer/winter)
9PB-ABBB3-0060
9PB-ABBB3-0D60
: Direct connected energy meter rated current, : Optional
Type (3 Phase)
Nominal voltage AC
(-%20Un...+%15Un)
Nominal (max) current AC
Screen
Measurement type
Connections
Test output imp /KWh
Beginning current (mA)
Nominal frequency (Hz)
Accuarcy class
Control input (Voltage Endurance)
Time accuarcy (23 Cde)
Insulation
Electro-magnetic high frequency
Electrostatic discharge (IEC 61036-4-2)
Relative humidity
Ambient temperature
Storring temperature
Protection class
Materials
Terminal materials
Communication
Data protection
Tariff coefficient
Tariff units
Integrated/Calendar coupling clock
Order code
FTS3K-FTS3KD (Active+Reactive)
3 phased 4 wires
3 x 220 / 380 V
3 x 5 (10) A
LCD
Active + Reactive (3 phased) X5
= 5 mm
5000
FTS3H-FTS3D (Active)
3 phased 4 wires
3 x 220 / 380 V
3 x 10 (80) A
2 x 16 character LCD
Active (3 phased) Direct
= 10 mm
1000
9PB-ABBB3-0005
9PB-ABBB3-0D05
9PB-ABBB3-0080
9PB-ABBB3-0D80
FSM60
1 phased 2 wires
220 V
10 (60) A
= 6 mm
LCD
1000
FSM50
1 phased 2 wires
220 V
10 (50) A
= 6 mm
LCD
1000
FMS602
1 phased 2 wires
220 V
10 (60) A
= 8.5 mm
Numerator
3200
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF MULTI-TARIFF ELECTRONIC ENERGY METERS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF MULTI-TARIFF ELECTRONIC ENERGY METERS
17/4
-2006
DIMENSIONS OF MULTI-TARIFF ELECTRONIC ENERGY METERS DIMENSIONS OF MULTI-TARIFF ELECTRONIC ENERGY METERS
FMS601-FSM602-FSM50 (Single Phase) :
FTS3 - FTS3H - FTS3K (Three Phase) :
FSM60 (Single Phase) :
11.75
20.75 10.5
8.5
107
1
6
5
45.5
23
1
3
0
84.5
90.5
165
124
9
2
.
5
2
0
7
.
5
3
0
0
1
1
8
26 113
1
1
3
2
0
0
2
0
7
.
5
3
.
7
5
45
6
0
7.5
1
1
1
.
5
3
0
52.5 60
82.5
2
2
4
.
5
140
149
134
15
18
13
4
55
6
155
1
8
5
1
1
58.75
9 11.75
51.5
1
5
1
27.75
138
130
FTS3D - FTS3HD - FTS3KD (Three Phase) :
18 18
EasyPan
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
-2006
2
4
5
6
18/1
General and Technical Information About EasyPan
Distribution Boards
Order Codes of EasyPan
Distribution Boards
Accessories and Order Codes of EasyPan
Distribution Boards
Dimensions of EasyPan
Distribution Boards
EasyPan
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
EP1 EP2
EP3
EasyPan
Distribution Boards EasyPan
Distribution Boards
CONTENTS CONTENTS
Federal Easypan distribution boards are used in
residence and industrial establishments for power
distribution, lighting appliances, circuit protection and
over current protection. Federal Easypan distribution
boards are manufactured in accordance with IEC
60439-1 and in two types as flush mounted and
surface mounted.
-2006
18/2
Easy Installation
Easy and Safety Maintenance
Esthetic design
Appropriate design for FEDERAL products
Convertible accessories
Both fully installed and only busbar installed available
Circuit Breaker, Switch and RCCB is available as main
circuit breaker
Available for direct connection without main breaker
Pan Assembly
Cable knockouts on top, bottom and both sides
Light Grey (RAL7032) electrostatic power finish painted,
1,2 mm DKP iron sheet (Galvanized iron sheet or different
colors is available when required)
Degree of protection IP40
Phase indication with colored labels: Red (R phase), Yellow
(S phase), Blue (T phase)
Features
Busbar
Main bus connector
Main Circuit mounting plate
Mounting hole
Neutral terminals
Grounding terminals
MCB connection bar
MCB mounting rail
Busbar and MCB mounting plate
Protection cover for busbars
Protection cover for neutral
and grounding terminals
Terminal cover of main
circuit breaker
Protection cover for
direct contact to busbars
Removable cable entry
General
GENERAL AND TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT EasyPan
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS GENERAL AND TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT EasyPan
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
-2006
18/3
Type
Nominal residual current
Rated current
Number of poles
Rated short circuit breaking capacity with fuse
mA
A
kA
rms
IEC 61008-1 EN 61008-1
Residual Current Circuit Breakers :
FK3
30 300
25, 40, 63
2,4
3
FK30
Type
Rated current (In)
Number of poles
Rated short circuit breaking capacity
A
kA
rms
IEC 60947-3
Circuit Switches :
FMS
63, 80, 100
2, 3
12 In / 1sn
Circuit switch: Unprotected thermal-magnetic switch on-off circuit breaker
Type
Characteristic
Rated short circuit breaking capacity
Rated current
Number of poles
kA
rms
A
FMH
B, C
6
6,10,16,20,25,32,40,50,63
1, 2, 3, 4
10
6,10,16,20,25,32,40,50,63
IEC 60898 EN 60898
Miniature Circuit Breakers :
Rated current - In (40C or 55C)
Rated current adjustment range - I1
Rated Ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity - Icu
(a.c.) 50-60 Hz 3x415 V
(a.c.) 50-60 Hz 3x240 V
100,125,160,200,225,250
Fixed
35 50 65
65 85 100
Type
A
A
(kA rms)
(kA rms)
F33 F31 F32 F22 F21 F11 F10
EN 60947-2 / IEC 60947-2
L. V. Circuit Breakers :
63,80,100,125
Fixed
25 50
50 100
63,80,100,125
Fixed
16 20
25 30
18 18
GENERAL AND TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT EasyPan
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS GENERAL AND TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT EasyPan
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
: Type of RCCB (0FK3,FK30), : Number of
poles (2,4), : Rated current of RCCB
(040,063).
Example: Order code of surface mounted, 18
ways, 30mA, 2 poles 40A RCCB mounted
EasyPan:
9VK-0FK3U1-2040 9VM- A1-
9VK- A1-
9VK- A2-
9VB- A1-
9VB- A2-
9VM- U1-
9VK- U1-
9VK- U2-
9VB- U1-
9VB- U2-
12
18
24
30
36
Number
of ways
Order Code
Flush Mounted Surface Mounted
Order Code
EP1
EP3
3. Order Codes for EasyPan
with Residual Current Circuit Breaker :

Type
Installation
Rated short circuit
breaking capacity
with fuse (kArms)
3x415 V / 3x240 V
3
3
EP2 3
: Circuit Breaker type (F10...F33), : Ambient
temperature (20C:1, 30C:2, 40C:3, 50C:4,
55C:5), : Rated Current of MCCB (016...225).
Example; Order code of surface mounted, 30 ways,
F33 225A circuit breaker mounted (Ambient
temperature 40C) easy pan: 9VB-F33U3-3225
For ordering Easypan without Circuit Breaker,
please indicate the type of circuit breaker and
indicate the order code as : 0, : 000
Example; order code of easypan without breaker,
suitable for the installation of F3 series circuit
breakers, surface mounted, 30 ways: 9VB-F3 U3-
0000
9VK- A1-
9VK- A2-
9VB- A1-
9VB- A2-
9VK- U1-
9VK- U2-
9VB- U1-
9VB- U2-
18
24
30
36
Number
of ways
Order Code
Order Code
EP1
EP3
with Circuit Breaker :

Type
Installation
Rated short circuit
breaking capacity (kArms)
3x415 V / 3x240 V
16,20,25,35,50,65 /
25,30,50,65,85,100
16,20,25,35,50,65 /
25,30,50,65,85,100
16,20,25,35,50,65 /
25,30,50,65,85,100
EP2
12 9VM- A1- 9VM- U1-
*Without using main circuit breaker the board is
energized by connecting an extension bar to the
main bus bar.
9VM-DDDA1-0000
9VK-DDDA1-0000
9VK-DDDA2-0000
9VB-DDDA1-0000
9VB-DDDA2-0000
9VM-DDDU1-0000
9VK-DDDU1-0000
9VK-DDDU2-0000
9VB-DDDU1-0000
9VB-DDDU2-0000
12
18
24
30
36
Number
of ways
Order Code
Order Code
EP2
EP3
1. Order Codes for Direct Connection* EasyPan
Type
Installation
EP1
-2006
18/4
: Ambient temperature (20C:2, 30C:3, 40C:4, 50C:5,
55C:6)
: Number of poles (1, 2, 3, 4)
: Rated current of MCB (06...63)
Example: order code of 1 pole, B type 16A (10kA) miniature
circuit breaker (ambient temperature 40C): 9EB-B1041-0016
Order Codes for MCBs*
(For MCB mounted Easypan requirements)
B Type
C Type
6 kA 10 kA
Rated short circuit
breaking capacity
kArms
For more information regarding circuit breakers, residual
current circuit breakers and circuit switches; please check
related brochures or catalogues.
9VM-FMSA1-
9VK-FMSA1-
9VK-FMSA2-
9VB-FMSA1-
9VB-FMSA2-
9VM-FMSU1-
9VK-FMSU1-
9VK-FMSU2-
9VB-FMSU1-
9VB-FMSU2-
12
18
24
30
36
Number
of ways
Order Code
Order Code
EP1
EP2
with Lock
Type
Installation
12 In / 1 sn
Rated short
circuit breaking
capacity
12 In / 1 sn
EP3 12 In / 1 sn
: Pole numbers (2,3), : Key rated current (063,080,100).
Example: Order code of flush mounted, 36 ways, 3 poles 100A EasyPan:
9VB-FMSA4-3100
Rated short circuit breaking capacity of Easypan distribution boards
is similar with the main circuit breaker.
5. Please contact with our company for other combinations
ORDER CODES OF EasyPan
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS ORDER CODES OF EasyPan
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
Extension bar for direct connection
Order codes
YP-0047
Type of main circuit breaker
Standard
Type of main circuit breaker Order codes
Mounting rail for switch and RCCB
FMS
FK3 - FK30
YP-0045
YP-0046
Type Order codes
Type Order codes
Type of miniature circuit breaker Order codes
Number of ways Order codes
Accessories
Number of ways
12
18
24
30
36
YP-0021
YP-0022
YP-0023
YP-0024
YP-0025
YP-0026
YP-0027
YP-0028
YP-0029
YP-0030
F10, F11
F21, F22
F31, F32, F33
2 kutup FK3, FK30
4 kutup FK3, FK30
2 kutup FMS
3 kutup FMS
Direct connection
YP-0031
YP-0032
YP-0033
YP-0034
YP-0035
YP-0036
YP-0037
YP-0038
F10, F11
F21, F22
F31, F32, F33
2 pole FK3, FK30, FMS
4 pole FK3, FK30
3 pole FMS
Standard
Neutral + Grounding terminals
Terminal Cover
Main bus connector
MCB filler plates
(for closing the empty ways of MCB)
MCB mounting pan with mainbusbar
Order codes
YP-0039
YP-0040
YP-0041
YP-0042
YP-0043
YP-0044
YP-0049
Standard
Lock mechanism
YP-0050
Standard
Terminal Cover for distribution busbar
YP-0051
YP-0048 Standard
Main circuit breaker mounting pan
-2006
18/5
12
18
24
30
36
18 18
ACCESSORIES AND ORDER CODES OF EasyPan
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS ACCESSORIES AND ORDER CODES OF EasyPan
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
EasyPan Busbar System
Features:
-Connection possibility of 250A, 400A and 630A main circuit breaker.
-Output possibility as 2,4,6,10 or 12 ways (3 poles)with Federal F10 or F11 type circuit breaker.
-Easy assemble
-Easy and reliable maintenance
-Modular design.
-Esthetical appearance
-Full equipment
-Shipping possibility in optional panel.
-Direct connecting possibility without main circuit breaker.
-Marking the phases by colourful sticker.
-2006
18/6
Detailed technical drawing of cable entries :
DIMENSIONS OF EasyPan
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS DIMENSIONS OF EasyPan
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
235
4
9
0
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
D D
D D
B
C
C
C
C B
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
Completely removable
cover plate
Diameters of
knock outs (mm)
A: 44, 50, 62
B: 28, 35
C: 18, 25
D: 39, 45
A
A
Sample connection diagram :
36 ways
Easypan EP3 Type
R T S
22
30
32
36
34
24
26
28
8
16
20
18
12
14
10
4
6
2
G
r
o
u
n
d
i
n
g
N
e
u
t
r
a
l
N
N
e
u
t
r
a
l
G
r
o
u
n
d
i
n
g
N
Main
circuit
breaker
21
29
33
35
31
25
27
23
7
17
19
15
11
13
9
3
5
1
Technical Drawing :
Flush Mounted
H
385
360
1
1
5
h
120
EP1
EP2
EP3
520
630
735
495
605
710
H h
Flush
Mounted
h
120
Surface Mounted
H
360
1
1
5
365
EP1
EP2
EP3
500
610
715
495
605
710
H h
Surface
Mounted
19 19
-2006
Equipment Panel
19/1
AUTOMATIC CONTROL UNIT of HEATING
SYSTEMS for PASSENGER COACH
AUTOMATIC CONTROL UNIT of HEATING
SYSTEMS for PASSENGER COACH
Electrical Automatical Heating Systems Electrical Automatical Heating Systems
2-3 Technical and General Information of Automatical Control Unit of Heating Systems
CONTENTS CONTENTS
-2006
General :
Electrical Automatical Heating system is generally used for
passenger railway cars.
It consists of following parts.
- Equipment Panel
- Main Switch
- Power Contactor
- Low Voltage Relay
- Distribution Fuse
1-Heating System (1000 V)
19/2
Equipment Panel :
Main and Auxiliary Equipment panels are assembled under
the passenger railway car. They have 4mm length and
include stainless steel material. Protection class IP54 has
a security system for touching, dust and water input.
Main and auxiliary equipment panels are given to the railway
car with cable connections made and ready to assembly.
Opening of equipment panels cover, under voltage is
prevent ed wi t h mechani c l ocki ng mechani sm.
It consists of following parts
- Equipment Panel
- Main Switch
- Power Contactor
- Electronic Voltage Selecting Relay
- Level Changing Motor Circuit Breaker
2- Heating System (1000-1500-3000V)
Main Switch :
These switches are manufactured for 50kW heating power.
For 1000 V AC, DC, 50 A
For 3000 V DC, 16.7 A
Main switch mechanism is a cam switch with spring that
has a 90 moment breaking.
This mechanism locks the system when the cover is opened.
Switching on is prevented by this way.
Power Contactor :
Power Contactor is used at every electric circuit for
commanding heaters. This contactor is a magnetic polarized
contactor.
Technical Specification :
Type : FEC
Using Class : AC1 / DC1
Nominal Power : 16 kW 3000 V AC/DC
Number of Contacts (Ad) : 1
Auxiliary Contact : 1 open / 1 close < 10 A
Coil Voltage : 24, 72, 120 VDC
Weight : 3,2 kg
Insulation : C group for VDE 0110
There are 8 contactors at equipment panel and there are 6
contactors at auxiliary equipment panel. Auxiliary equipment
panel is manufactured according to orders.
Main Fuse :
Operating Voltage : 3000 V AC/DC
Operating Current : 6 A
Insulated body is manufactured with high ceramic dough,
which has a mechanic resistance of main fuse. Cylindrical
shaped ceramic body is equipped with covers and contact
knives at both ends. Melting wire is pure silver.( it doesnt
depend on corrosion) Fuses have a normally delaying
characteristic. Quartz sand is used as arc extinguishing
material.
Fuses limit the short circuit current with a high measurement
in a short circuit position and so, they protect the system
against to thermal and dynamical forces.
Main fuses are manufactured as knife fuses and fixed to
equipment panel. Therefore, maintenance operations of this
product are made without voltage applied. When the cover
is opened, fuses prevent the contact of the cover plate and
human.
Coil operating voltage is DC. Contactor is manufactured as
C insulating class according to VDE 0110, and as D device
group according to VDE 0660 standards. Operating coil is
bridged with a diot and serial connected resistance to have
protection from over voltage.
Pic-1 Automatical Heating System for Passenger Railway Car
Pic- 2 Power Contactor
TECHNICAL and GENERAL INFORMATION of AUTOMATICAL CONTROL UNIT of HEATING SYSTEMS TECHNICAL and GENERAL INFORMATION of AUTOMATICAL CONTROL UNIT of HEATING SYSTEMS
19 19
-2006
19/3
1000 V Under Voltage Relay :
Operating Field : 450-1000 V AC
600-1200 V DC
Open-Close Capacity : 1 A at 24 V DC
Low voltage relay is operating between 450 V AC (600 V DC)
and 1000 V AC (1200 V DC) (%10) . It directly gives contact
output. This contact and high voltage is insulated from each
other. This relay is towards to voltage at heating system. If
the voltage is higher than 450V AC (600 V DC), operating
command is issued and heaters switch on. If this voltage is
lower than 300V AC (360 V DC) heaters are switch off.
Distribution Fuse :
Operating Voltage : 3000 V AC/DC
Operating Current : 6 A
Cylindrical fiberglass not flaming thermoset body is used
at distribution fuses. There are connection terminals on the
body and pure silver melting wire and quartz sand as arc
extinguisher are inside of the product.
Electronic Voltage Selectivity Relay :
Operating Way :
High Voltage is divided on resistances and sent to four-
measurement step.
These are at AC 1000V, 1500V
at DC 1500V, 3000V the steps.
Also, there are two overload measurement levels instead of
these four measurement levels (one AC, the other DC). If
an overload is determined higher than 1850 V AC, 3750 V
DC at both measurement levels, 3000 V position is selected
and heaters are switch off.
With the sign which is obtained from measurement rank,
signal is given to the related transistor, and relay with having
a time delay.
Technical Specification :
Operating Field : 650 V AC - 1875 V AC
1000 V DC - 4000 V DC
Operating Levels : 1000, 1500 V AC
1500, 3000 V DC
Battery Voltage : 24 V DC (18-32 V DC)
Level Changing Motor Circuit is manufactured for equipment
panel with group of 8 and for auxiliary equipment panel with
group of 6.Groups that are assembled on to the chassis are
manufactured with transparent and not flaming material and
contacts are seen easily. Level changing motor circuit
breaker has the contacts 1000,1500 and 3000V positions
with the assistance of servomotors by receiving the signal
from the electronic voltage selecting relay and transmit the
electrical energy to the power contact.
Level Changing Motor Circuit Breaker :
Pic- 3 Main fuse
Pic- 4 Distrubtion fuse
TECHNICAL and GENERAL INFORMATION of AUTOMATICAL CONTROL UNIT of HEATING SYSTEMS TECHNICAL and GENERAL INFORMATION of AUTOMATICAL CONTROL UNIT of HEATING SYSTEMS
20 20
Technical Information
Selection Of Protective Component For Transformers And Motors With 3 Phase
Selection Of Federal Protection And Circuit Components For Squirrel Cage Asynchronous Motor
Selection Of Federal Protection And Circuit Components For Squirrel Cage Asynchronous Motor
20/1
2
3
4
5
-2006
TECHNICAL INFORMATION TECHNICAL INFORMATION
CONTENTS CONTENTS
-2006
20/2
Type Test :
Test of one or more devices made to a certain design to show
that the design meets certain specifications
Routine Test :
Test to which each individual device is subjected during and/or
after manufacture to ascertain whether it complies with certain
criteria
Rated Value :
Value of a quantity used for specification purposes, established
for a specified set of operating
conditions of a component, device, equipment, or system
Nominal Value :
Value of a quantity used to designate and identify a
component, device, equipment, or system
Current Type:
Circuit Breakers are selected for AC and DC current
according to consumer operating in AC or DC current.
Making Capacity :
Value of prospective making current that a switching device
is capable of making at a stated voltage under prescribed
conditions of use and behaviour
Breaking Capacity :
Value of prospective breaking current that a switching device
or a fuse is capable of breaking at a stated voltage under
prescr i bed condi t i ons of use and behavi our .
Rated Frequency (f) :
The supply frequency for which an equipment is designed
and to which the other characteristic values correspond.
Nominal Voltage (Un) :
It is the nominal value of network voltage that breaker is
used. Nominal Voltage is taken reference for determination
of beginning capacity. Always, Un is the voltage between
phases in the three phases A.C currents systems. Voltage
between phases is expressed in three phase circuits.
Rated operational voltage (Ue) :
A rated operational voltage of an equipment is a value of
voltage which, combined with a rated operational current,
determines the application of the equipment and to which
the relevant tests and the utilization categories are referred.
For single-pole equipment, the rated operational voltage is
generally stated as the voltage across the pole.
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) :
The rated insulation voltage of an equipment is the value of
voltage to which dielectric tests and creepage distances
are referred.
In no case shall the maximum value of the rated operational
voltage exceed that of the rated insulation voltage.
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) :
The peak value of an impulse voltage of prescribed form
and polarity which the equipment is capable of withstanding
without failure under specified conditions of test and to
which the values of the clearances are referred.
The rated impulse withstand voltage of an equipment shall
be equal to or higher than the values stated for the transient
overvoltages occurring in the circuit in which the equipment
is fitted.
Nominal Current (In):
It is the current value that in nominal atmosphere conditions
limit heating-up and limit temperature is not be overtaken.
Conventional free air thermal current (Ith):
The conventional free air thermal current is the maximum
value of test current to be used for temperature-rise tests of
unenclosed equipment in free air. The value of the conventional
free air thermal current shall be at least equal to the maximum
value of the rated operational current of the unenclosed
equipment in eight-hour duty. Free air is understood to be air
under normal indoor conditions reasonably free from draughts
and external radiation.
Nominal Operating Current (Ie) :
Nominal operating current value of a breaker is defined by
manufacturer and this value is related to nominal operating
voltage, nominal frequency, nominal operating current, and
protection type and using category.
Rated making capacity :
The rated making capacity of an equipment is a value of
current, stated by the which the equipment can satisfactorily
make under specified making conditions. The rated making
capacity is stated by reference to the rated operational voltage
and rated operational current, according to the relevant
product standard.
Rated breaking capacity :
The rated breaking capacity of all equipment is a value of
current, stated by the manufacturer, which the equipment
can satisfactorily break, under specified breaking conditions.
The rated breaking capacity is stated by reference to the
rated operational voltage and rated operational current,
according to the relevant product standard. An equipment
shall be capable of breaking any value of current up to and
including its rated breaking capacity.
Rated short-circuit making capacity (Icm) :
The rated short-circuit making capacity of an equipment is
the value of short-circuit making capacity assigned to that
equipment by the manufacturer for the rated operational
voltage, at rated frequency, and at a specified power-factor
for a.c. or time constant for d.c. lt is expressed as the maximum
prospective peak current, under prescribed conditions.
Nominal Short Circuit Breaking Capacity (Icu) :
Nominal short circuit breaking capacity of hardware is a
breaking capacity value that is defined by manufacturer for
this hardware in nominal frequency, a designated power
factor for A.C or nominal operating voltage for D.C in time
fixed. This value is expressed as the highest waited breaking
current value (factor value of A.C component as A.C state)
in beforehand designated conditions.
Mechanical Life:
Hardware is characterized with the number of operating cycle
before changing of any mechanical parts or end of
maintenance according to related product standart description
about endurance against mechanical corrosion as unload.
But, for hardware which is planed maintenance, normal
maintenance is allowed as manufacturer instruction. Every
operating cycle consist of a closed operating and come after
this an opened operating.
Electrical Life:
Hardware is characterized with the number of operating cycle
belongs to maintenance condition related product standard
without repair or changing about endurance against electrical
corrosion.
TECHNICAL INFORMATION TECHNICAL INFORMATION
20 20
-2006
20/3
* UVR: Undervoltage Release
Un-Protection
Limeted Protection
Good Protection
Full Protection
Protection State
Operating:
Overload at uninterrupted operating
Move forward more long and brake
Stop-Start more frequently
Failure:
Stay on two phases
Frequency undulate
Rotor catch in
Move forward with brake rotor
on motors has critic stator
on motors has critic rotor
Ventilator parts
High ambient temperature
Plugged of cooling air
O
v
e
r

H
e
a
t
i
n
g
Protection with
NH Fuses (or
Load Break
Switch)
Protection with
NH Fuses (or
Load Break
Switch),
Contactor and
Thermal Relay
Protection with
NH Fuses (or
Load Break
Switch) and
Motor protection
Switch includes
U.V.R
Protection with
Thermal
Magnetic
Automatic
Switch includes
UVR
Protection with
Thermal
Magnetic
Automatic
Switch and
Thermistor
Protection with
NH Fuse (or
Load Break
switch),
Contactor,
Thermal Relay
and Thermistor
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
6
6
6
6
6
6
1.3
1.6
2
2.6
3.2
4
5.1
6.4
8
10.1
12.8
16
20.2
19.2
24
30
38.5
48.1
60
16
25
35
50
70
95
120
185
240
2(30x5)
2(40x5)
40x12
40x15
2(40x10)
80x15
2(80x10)
2(80x15)
2(100x15)
3(100x15)
63
80
100
125
160
200
250
300
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1600
2000
2500
3200
4000
F12/F22/F33
F12/F22/F33
F12/F22/F33
F12/F22/F33
F12/F33
F33/F53
F53
F62/F71/F83E
F62/F71/F83E
F71/F82E/F83E
F71/F83E/F123E
F71/F83E/F123E
F92E/F123E
F92E/F102E/F123E
F102E/F112E/F123E
F112E/F123E
F112E/F133E
F133E
F143E
20-65
20-65
20-65
20-65
20-65
35-65
35-65
35-65
35-65
35-65
35-100
35-100
65-100
65-100
65-100
65-100
65-100
70-100
70-100
FAT30-60/5
FAT30-80/5
FAT30-100/5
FAT30-125/5
FAT30-150/5
FAT30-200/5
FAT30-250/5
FAT40-300/5
FAT40-400/5
FAT40-500/5
FAT60-600/5
FAT60-800/5
FAT60-1000/5
FAT100-1250/5
FAT100-1600/5
FAT100-2000/5
FAT100-2500/5
FAT100-3000/5
FAT130-4000/5
Short
Circuit
Voltage
Usc (%)
3 Phase
Max. Short
Circuit
Current
Isc (kA)
Copper
cross
section
Circuit
Breaker
Rated
Current
In (A)
Suitable
Federal
Circuit Breaker
FEDERAL max.
Nominal Short
Circuit Breaking
Capacity Icu (kA)
Suitable
FEDERAL
Current
Transformer
58
72
91
115
144
180
231
289
361
455
578
723
910
1156
1445
1805
2312
2900
3600
Transformer
Nominal
Current
In (A)
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
200
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1600
2000
2500
Transformer
Power
S (kVA)
SELECTION OF CIRCUIT BREAKER ACCORDING TO TRANSFORMER POWER
SELECTION TABLE OF PROTECTIVE COMPONENT FOR MOTORS WITH 3 PHASE
SELECTION OF PROTECTIVE COMPONENT FOR TRANSFORMERS AND MOTORS WITH 3 PHASE SELECTION OF PROTECTIVE COMPONENT FOR TRANSFORMERS AND MOTORS WITH 3 PHASE
-2006
20/4
3.5
5
6.6
7.7
8.5
11.5
15.5
18.5
22
30
37
44
60
72
85
105
138
170
205
245
300
370
408
460
584
Motor
Rated
Current
In (A)
-
-
-
-
F12/F22/F33
F12/F22/F33
F12/F22/F33
F12/F22/F33
F12/F22/F33
F12/F22/F33
F12/F22/F33
F12/F22/F33
F12/F22/F33
F12/F22/F33
F12/F22/F33
F12/F22/F33
F12/F33
F33/F53
F33/F53
F53
F62/F71/F83E
F62/F71/F83E
F71/F83E
F71/F83E
F71/F83E/F123E
Suitable
FEDERAL
Circuit Breaker
-
-
-
-
16
16
25
25
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
200
225
250
300
400
500
500
630
Circuit
Breaker
Rated
Current
In (A)
FSF(FVS)160
FSF(FVS)160
FSF(FVS)160
FSF(FVS)160
FSF(FVS)160
FSF(FVS)160
FSF(FVS)160
FSF(FVS)160
FSF(FVS)160/250
FSF(FVS)160/250
FSF(FVS)160/250/400
FSF(FVS)160/250/400
FSF(FVS)160/250/400
FSF(FVS)160/250/400
FSF(FVS)160/250/400
FSF(FVS)250/400
FSF(FVS)250/400
FSF(FVS)250/400/630
FSF(FVS)400/630
FSF(FVS)400/630
FSF(FVS)400/630
FSF(FVS)630
FSF(FVS)630
FSF(FVS)630
FSF(FVS)630
Suitable FEDERAL
Load Break Switch
NH00
NH00
NH00
NH00
NH00/0
NH00/0
NH00/0
NH00/0
NH00/0/1
NH00/0/1
NH00/0/1/2
NH00/0/1/2
NH00/0/1/2
NH00/0/1/2
NH00/0/1/2
NH1/2
NH1/2
NH1/2/3
NH2/3
NH2/3
NH2/3
NH3
NH3
NH3
NH3
Suitable
Federal
Fuse
Base (FA)
NHC00/00
NHC00/00
NHC00/00
NHC00/00
NHC00/00
NHC00/00/0
NHC00/00/0
NHC00/00/0
NHC00/00/0/1
NHC00/00/0/1
NHC00/00/0/1/2
NHC00/00/0/1/2
NHC00/00/0/1/2
NH00/0/1/2
NH00/0/1/2
NH1/2
NH1/2
NH1/2/3
NH2/3
NH2/3
NH2/3
NH3
NH3
NH3
NH3
Suitable FEDERAL
NH Fuse
Height (FB)
6
10
16
20
25
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
100
125
125
200
200
250
315
315
400
500
500
500
630
NH Fuse
Current
In (A)
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
4
6
10
10
16
25
25
35
50
50
70
95
120
120
240
240
240
2(30x5)
2(30x5)
2x185
Copper
cross
section
(mm2)
1.5
2.2
3
3.7
4
5.5
7.5
9
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
250
315
Motor
Power
P(kW)
Direct Feeding* :
3.5
5
6.6
7.7
8.5
11.5
15.5
18.5
22
30
37
44
60
72
85
105
138
170
205
245
300
370
408
460
584
Motor
Rated
Current
In (A)
Suitable
FEDERAL
Curren
Trasformer
Suitable
Contactor
Current
Ie (A)
Suitable
FEDERAL
Contactor
Thermal
Relay
Adjusting
Range
Ie (A)
Suitable
FEDERAL
Thermal
Relay
Motor Protection
Switch Thermal
Adjusting Range
Ie (A)
Suitable
FEDERAL
Motor
Protection
Switch
FAT30-30/5
FAT30-30/5
FAT30-30/5
FAT30-30/5
FAT30-30/5
FAT30-30/5
FAT30-30/5
FAT30-30/5
FAT30-30/5
FAT30-30/5
FAT30-40/5
FAT30-50/5
FAT30-75/5
FAT30-75/5
FAT30-100/5
FAT30-150/5
FAT30-150/5
FAT30-200/5
FAT30-250/5
FAT30-250/5
FAT40-300/5
FAT40-400/5
FAT40-500/5
FAT40-500/5
FAT60-600/5
9
9
9
9
9
12
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
95
115
145
185
260
260
300
400
460
460
630
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-12D
FC-18D
FC-25D
FC-25D
FC-32D
FC-40D
FC-50D
FC-65D
FC-80D
FC-95D
FC-115D
FC-150D
FC-220D
FC-260D
FC-260D
FC-300D
-
-
-
-
2.8-4
4.5-6.3
5,5-8
7-10
7-10
9-12.5
14-20
17-22
20-25
23-32
30-40
37-50
55-70
63-80
75-105
95-125
100-160
125-200
200-315
200-315
250-400
315-500
315-500
400-630
400-630
FTR25
FTR25
FTR25
FTR25
FTR25
FTR25
FTR25
FTR25
FTR25
FTR32
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
2.5-4
4 - 6.3
6.3-10
6.3-10
6.3-10
10-16
10-16
16-20
20-25
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
FMK25-4
FMK25-6.3
FMK25-10
FMK25-10
FMK25-10
FMK25-16
FMK25-16
FMK25-20
FMK25-25
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1.5
2.2
3
3.7
4
5.5
7.5
9
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
250
315
Motor
Power
P(kW)
*According to IEC 292 standard for 380 V, 1500 or 3000 rotation asynchronous
** Because of high endurance for over load and short circuit circuit breakers have high breaking capacity are prefered
SELECTION OF FEDERAL PROTECTION AND CIRCUIT COMPONENTS FOR SQUIRREL CAGE ASYNCHRONOUS MOTOR SELECTION OF FEDERAL PROTECTION AND CIRCUIT COMPONENTS FOR SQUIRREL CAGE ASYNCHRONOUS MOTOR
20 20
-2006
20/5
FMK25-4
FMK25-6.3
FMK25-10
FMK25-10
FMK25-10
FMK25-16
FMK25-16
FMK25-20
FMK25-25
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Suitable
FEDERAL
motor
Protection
Switch
2.5 - 4
4 - 6.3
6.3-10
6.3-10
6.3-10
10-16
10-16
16-20
20-25
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Motor Protection
Switch Thermal
Adjusting
Range Ie (A)
1.8-2.5
2.2-3.2
2.8-4
3.5-5
4.5-6.3
5,5-8
7-10
9-12.5
11-16
14-20
20-25
23-32
30-40
38-50
48-57
57-66
63-80
75-105
100-160
100-160
125-200
200-315
200-315
200-315
250-400
Thermal
Relay
Adjusting
Range
Ie (A)
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-18D
FC-25D
FC-32D
FC-32D
FC-50D
FC-50D
FC-80D
FC-80D
FC-150D
FC-150D
FC-220D
FC-220D
FC-260D
FC-260D
Suitable
Federal
Contactor
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
16
25
32
32
50
50
80
80
145
145
185
185
260
260
Star
Feeding
Remote
Control
Current Ie (A)
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-12D
FC-12D
FC-12D
FC-18D
FC-18D
FC-32D
FC-40D
FC-50D
FC-50D
FC-65D
FC-80D
FC-150D
FC-150D
FC-220D
FC-220D
FC-260D
FC-260D
-
-
Suitable
Federal
Contactor
9
9
9
9
9
9
12
12
12
16
16
32
40
50
50
65
80
145
145
185
185
260
260
400
400
Delta
Feeding
Remote
Control
Current Ie (A)
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-09D
FC-12D
FC-12D
FC-12D
FC-18D
FC-18D
FC-32D
FC-50D
FC-50D
FC-50D
FC-65D
FC-80D
FC-150D
FC-150D
FC-220D
FC-220D
FC-260D
FC-260D
-
-
Suitable
Federal
Contactor
9
9
9
9
9
9
12
12
12
16
16
32
50
50
50
65
80
145
145
185
185
260
260
400
400
Line Feeding
Remote-
Control
Current
Ie (A)
3.5
5
6.6
7.7
8.5
11.5
15.5
18.5
22
30
37
44
60
72
85
105
138
170
205
245
300
370
408
460
584
Motor
Rated
Current
In (A)
1.5
2.2
3
3.7
4
5.5
7.5
9
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
250
315
Motor
Power
P (kW)
FTR25
FTR25
FTR25
FTR25
FTR25
FTR25
FTR25
FTR25
FTR25
FTR25
FTR25
FTR32
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Suitable
Federal
Thermal
Relay
*According to IEC 292 standard for 380 V, 1500 or 3000 rotation asynchronous
** Because of high endurance for over load and short circuit circuit breakers have high breaking capacity are prefered
Star Delta Feeding* :
-
-
-
-
F22/F33
F22/F33
F22/F33
F22/F33
F22/F33
F22/F33
F22/F33
F22/F33
F22/F33
F22/F33
F22/F33
F22/F33
F33
F33/F53
F33/F53
F53
F62/F71/F82E/F83E
F62/F71/F82E/F83E
F71/F82E/F83E
F71/F82E/F83E
F71/F83E/F123E
Suitable FEDERAL
Circuit Breaker
-
-
-
-
16
16
25
25
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
200
225
250
300
400
500
500
630
Circuit
Breaker
Rated
Current
In (A)
FSF(FVS)160
FSF(FVS)160
FSF(FVS)160
FSF(FVS)160
FSF(FVS)160
FSF(FVS)160
FSF(FVS)160
FSF(FVS)160
FSF(FVS)160
FSF(FVS)160
FSF(FVS)160/250
FSF(FVS)160/250
FSF(FVS)160/250
FSF(FVS)160/250/400
FSF(FVS)160/250/400
FSF(FVS)160/250/400
FSF(FVS)160/250/400
FSF(FVS)250/400
FSF(FVS)250/400/630
FSF(FVS)250/400/630
FSF(FVS)400/630
FSF(FVS)400/630
FSF(FVS)630
FSF(FVS)630
FSF(FVS)630
Suitable FEDERAL
Load Break Switch
NH00
NH00
NH00
NH00
NH00
NH00
NH00/0
NH00/0
NH00/0
NH00/0
NH00/0/1
NH00/0/1
NH00/0/1
NH00/0/1/2
NH00/0/1/2
NH00/0/1/2
NH00/0/1/2
NH1/2
NH1/2/3
NH1/2/3
NH2/3
NH2/3
NH3
NH3
NH3
Suitable
FEDERAL
NH Fuse
Base (FA)
NHC00/00
NHC00/00
NHC00/00
NHC00/00
NHC00/00
NHC00/00
NHC00/00/0
NHC00/00/0
NHC00/00/0
NHC00/00/0
NHC00/00/0/1
NHC00/00/0/1
NHC00/00/0/1
NHC00/00/0/1/2
NHC00/00/0/1/2
NH00/0/1/2
NH00/0/1/2
NH1/2
NH1/2/3
NH1/2/3
NH2/3
NH2/3
NH3
NH3
NH3
Suitable Federal
NH Fuse Height
(FB)
6
6
10
16
16
20
25
32
40
40
50
50
63
80
100
125
160
200
250
250
315
400
500
500
630
NH
Fuse
Current
In (A)
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
4
6
6
10
16
25
25
35
50
50
70
95
120
240
2(30x5)
2(30x5)
2(30x5)
2(30x5)
2x185
Copper
cross
section
(mm2)
3.5
5
6.6
7.7
8.5
11.5
15.5
18.5
22
30
37
44
60
72
85
105
138
170
205
245
300
370
408
460
584
Motor
Rated
Current
In (A)
1.5
2.2
3
3.7
4
5.5
7.5
9
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
250
315
Motor
Power
P (kW)
FAT30-30/5
FAT30-30/5
FAT30-30/5
FAT30-30/5
FAT30-30/5
FAT30-30/5
FAT30-30/5
FAT30-30/5
FAT30-30/5
FAT30-30/5
FAT30-40/5
FAT30-50/5
FAT30-75/5
FAT30-75/5
FAT30-100/5
FAT30-150/5
FAT30-150/5
FAT30-200/5
FAT30-250/5
FAT30-250/5
FAT40-300/5
FAT40-400/5
FAT40-500/5
FAT40-500/5
FAT60-600/5
Suitable
FEDERAL
Current
Transformer
SELECTION OF FEDERAL PROTECTION AND CIRCUIT COMPONENTS FOR SQUIRREL CAGE ASYNCHRONOUS MOTOR SELECTION OF FEDERAL PROTECTION AND CIRCUIT COMPONENTS FOR SQUIRREL CAGE ASYNCHRONOUS MOTOR
NOTES
-2006
www.federal.com.tr
All Over the World
will be continuous...
New Products
Multimeter Over Current Relay
Single MCB Box Installation Contactor Early Warning Relay
Power Analyser
Factory & Center:
1. O.S.B. Hanl Beldesi
SAKARYA / TRKYE
Tel : +90.264. 291 45 00 (Pbx)
Fax : +90.264. 275 41 81
web : www.federal.com.tr
e-mail : federal@federal.com.tr
FEDERAL ELECTRIC
Investment & Trade Co.
C
T
.

E
.

0
2

(
0
4
/
0
6
)
web : www.federaltrading.co.uk
e-mail : info@federaltrading.co.uk
FEDERAL ELECTRIC
Trading LTD. UK.
FEDERAL ELECTRIC Product Range
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Air Circuit Breakers
EasyPan Distribution Boards
Contactors
- Contactors For Capacitor Switching
- High Current Contactors
Low Voltage Power Capacitors
Cam Switches
Relays
- Reactive Power Control Units
- Motor Protection,
- Phase Sequence and Liquid Level Relays
- Phase Protection Relays
- Ground Fault Relay
- Thermal Overload Relays
- Timers
- Counters
- Thermostats
Circuit Switches
Residual Current Circuit Breaker
HRC Fuses and Fuse Bases
Motor Protection Switches
Load Break Switches &Switch Fuses
Vertical Type Circuit Switch
Low Voltage Current Transformers
Panelmeters (Analogue and Digital)
- Ammeters
- Max. Demand Ammeters
- Voltmeters
- Frequencymeters
Gas Meters
Power Analyzers
Automatic Control Unit of Heating Systems for
Passenger Coach (Railway Car)
10 kA 6 kA 3 kA

Catalog Federal

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catalog Federal

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

All Over The World

F33 F31 F32

Rated current - In (40 or 55C)

For class 0.5: A

For class 0.5: A

For class 0.5: A

For class 0.5: A

For class 0.5: A

For class 0.5: A

Capacitor capacity, which is connected to every phase at

Reactive Power Control Relay

Reactive Power Control Relay

9. Automatic switch on/off capacitors

REACTIVE POWER CONTROL RELAYS

Distribution Boards EasyPan

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS GENERAL AND TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT EasyPan

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS GENERAL AND TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT EasyPan

with Residual Current Circuit Breaker :

with Circuit Breaker :

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS ORDER CODES OF EasyPan

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS ACCESSORIES AND ORDER CODES OF EasyPan

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS DIMENSIONS OF EasyPan

You might also like